Boat Building Manual
Boat Building Manual
Boat Building Manual
in Ash
Boatbuilding
Manual ._I
by Robert M. Steward
Published by: International Marine Publishing 21 Elm Street Camden, Maine 04843
USA
Company
Reproduced by
permission.
Reprodlrction of this microfiche document in any form is subject to the same restrictions as those of the original document.
2n.d Edibbn
6v
International
Company
FOREWORD Vlll PREFACE ix PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION xi 1 GENERAL 1 2 PLANS 10 3 TOOLS 15 4 WOOD 19 5 FIBERGLASS AND OTHER HULL MATERIALS 6 FASTENINGS 46 7 LINES AND LAYING DOWN 66 8 MOLDS, TEMPLATES, AND THE BACKBONE 9 SETTING IJP 108 10 FRAMING 117 11 PLANKING 130 12 DECK FRAMING 153 13 DECKING 161 14 DECK JOINERWORK 170 15 INTERIOR JOINERWORK 182 16 MISCEELftNEOUS DETAILS 192 17 SAF!?Y STANDARDS 227 RECOMMENDED READING 231 EQUIVALENTS 233 INDEX 236
35
88
lh ligtlls otrt.11 showt*tl bright lalt* in lht* t~vt*ning 21 rht. ?i!i/zNItlJt) in IIiin1irlglc~l. Nt-w York, anal r2b1il inrlc- 10 (tfj 50 aI :\r~c~t~ortIowri J1c.w in D;hricw. I havv tvijovtd ;L titc~linic* intluc-ncxscl tjv I IIt. t;\tk of srnatt 1Jo;iIs 1tit-ir tlc3ign. I tIcA I)uittting. ;~rdl I ticbir us(*. Most rcwarclill,~ of all ;Ispc( lb. tx.1 tiat~s. arc ItIc* tc*:l(*:s lhdl ccbmc ;Itong It.1 I (.I!? c*ulcJilin,g Itic- <grand c~st)c-ric~ncx-c*n(.oulll~lt(l in ItIt* tJuil(liyg ot ;1 l)Oill! thc~rc~ has always Ilt-c-n gr~a saridac[ion 3 just itid fcc-tinSg 01 accomplishIlIlIll rrbla!td to making things with ones own hands. in this age of specialization I t)c~tit-v~ hoal huitding can offer tv~n morr satisfarrion as wctt as rrlaxalion and a c.ti:illc*ngc- (0 individual ahilitv and irigrnuitv. FPw things involvr Itit, manv skills rt*cluirot in \)uil(ting a bcJ;rt c;1( h rxscntial fat- it4 succxsful c~nnplcrion. PlJssibly nothing c*tsc*i5 as rc-wdrttin~g. I;urrht*r. nict-ly tastiiontd. d-t)uilt tJo;tts art* growing mort~ and mor(* t3pt-nsivt-. 10 huittt your own rn;iy wt*tl t)c*;I practic,,lt sotulion ;1s wcdt as rc*wirding. Surctv ttw ,jovs of bring krtloar ;ir(b manifoltl, and t host- t3ptGnc-rd ;Il~o;ird ;1 t>bJal you ti;lvt- Luitl
with your 0wI1 hdntls ;iI( inimt~dsurabtt-. Hot, Stcwartt. tGng t~sc~t~ptionalt~ welt quatiiicd t)v his tong c~sp~-rit*nix~ in r!ic world of small stiit~s. ha5 l)roductd ;I cl~~ai-iy writttbn Its1 of nici-it and grrat worth. Attt-r vt*ilrs as an ;~ppr~-ntic~~- ht. work4 in scvc-rat small boat vards btaforc joining rhr highly rcspecrerl office of naval architect Philip 1.. Rho&s. where he spent manv I yrars cn, gagecl in dcsi<gning and planning numcrous power and sailing vachts. as welt as commt~rciat boats. Ittt* prriod of World War II found him in an tyginrering c-apacitp working bt-twrlrn vari:jalq vards and &sign off&s. Far morr plcasanl work was . . >tirnrd at the wars t%ntI involving vat t.i ax: Bob ac\elrtit (! :I lx)sition wirh a Wrs. Coast firm as superint,.-dent of vachr repair anti construction. Somerime ti;Icr tx returnd IO I hc East Coast where a number of vac.hr designs werr proctucxd. ranging from 22 LO 73 ftet . which required his cxperirn&i supervision of loft in= anti cnnslruction. lhc vii
viii
wi! h its slowt~r l)acx- anti t*.isitar iivin,g. ant! 13oh ~onrinut~tl his work In~(jlv!rl,q the d~s~gn~n~ anti supervlslon of Ilumtrous var.lli\ PIt.st.~lr iv i~r*is !vi!i! a Floritla whtarl* iIt> is classic- work
co11t
warmer-
t-rncd
wit Ir I ht. cIt*sign rlntl prc),qrt*~~ 01 clulstantling I-cct*ivc-d from riumt~rous in atltliIion rlicb rimt- iI w;ls first
char
drawings.
anti practical
will provitlr~ ! ht- .rnialt~r- boatt~uilrlt~~ arid Itit+ f)roft3sional with ;I worltl 01 v;Ilutd ant1 valid information. Intlccd. scardv a wt.t-k passe-s wht*n. in wriring It-IIt-1-s I(J hoa huiltlvrs ail ovtt I IIt* world. I (1~:no1 sii#gt-51 Hofr(hrr/ltl/~rg ,tlfltrrrfr/ as ;d sourt(- 01 knowlt~tigc,
,~011l1 .Alhill ?I .s.r\ t\nc & XI.E
tl~lr-tl~nvIl
II is indt*tvl
ditficull
IO rt-;ili/cs rli;tl
Inic~rnaiional
iKl ii1 Tciir
Marim,
c .> rlihi ;irIll
fuhli5hing (:~m1l1;11iv wt.111 i11ro Ou4int*bs nritl ;1c.tluirc*cl ltw cxqyighr .ll,ctrrrtr/ II 11:*clM~~ll:I Ir.rr, I\' !Il:lI !-I.:;;:. !!E! ! !::*:x h;1LT !XX~I! :ici; 'Ul! ."I I i1ig llii~ tlt~ iidt.: Boris fhil Rhoclt5. l.au(-1. L.tv~n;irtli. ihca sniall OII(- of Ilit~ ,qwaItw ;i~Iti mosi vt*rs,iIili* 1i:i\~l
IO flotr//~rrr;tlttr~ Ir-itv1tl.
I1r~;1ll1uildt~1~ slaurit~li
ovt*r lilt- hoi izcjtr ~11tl dt( 111i55t*ill1v mdnv I v~*nl IO llavt* I1t7-Ii t,xl105tvI I0 Inilnv hrr//tltt/,q .IltrtIrrfl/
It~;ll~Ilt~tl 11~0111 11 1t
;illii il Il;is
irit-ncls. 111ort p(*iq)It~ 5im.t. Ilit- I;151 tvlili~,ti o! flflttr so m;inv who h;ivt* rt-;icl ~1111 l~i*i~Il gri11ifVilIg I0 mt 3 rhv Iwo vac~hr dt~sign sc~lioo~~ in IIitb I S. ~onlinuc~ lacht Dvsign School Insrirurcb. in Brooklin.
Sram-
10 us ford.
of 1ac-h1 DrsiRn.
Illill
carr1
iwlit~w lha~ Iht* rthacit-r will Iwrwfit fro1n my rt-srilrch ctirc-crly iIlltl lt*ll thtr11 wlI;ll you Ilt-tvt. In adtlitic1ri 10 thia fI!lolo and illusrration thank
of h11za.
crvdiis
sour(vs: Inc
Srcmann
Plastics.
given in the caarlit-r tditioll. I wish 10 \1il<hr CI~rpIIralion. ,rlItl Inc.. Hurkins 311lhis revis rdition: tliv Xirrbs ciisision . and SW nirigazinta articles that for permission IO us{ appeared in 7/1r Rudrf~~r
that
Dorothv C. Marks fo1 doing some of thth rt*vision meanin,g that she can I;pc a pa,gP 31 times rypIng
l);lriIlg PillllrsOIl. ii
ii
num!,ci
BusiIit-ss
I,f)c..ii.>
.i,gtt
\lillI
dntl
it/ltttlt*r lion
ilit-
Irtlr*
:4\111lL
ill
ilIlt
M;tIl;tgc~I~
rty)t7Iivt~ly
fintb (,I(1
(~011slruc
Illil#il/iIl~, ;tinlcVl
was clct~iclt4
I Shoultl
ill)OUt
IlIt-
amalt-uI ;tIl~l. Ilol!t~luII,. of soIlIt VillUt I0 lhca l~r0ft~SSiC~IIitl. -1lris (It7 ision It~sulltvl ii: ;I sturic5 of LOc.oIIst~ciIlivt* Inorlllllv l)itxx3 I Il;tl Mx*rt* So \\~t~ll rtxx~ivt~tl Ill;11 I hty wtrt- Illiltlt*
inlo il
i:ook.
Jht-
rtw~f>litrIl
ol
Ihis,
IOO.
was c~IiIhusi,isIic.
~llill
~)on
.itlt*l
iI
w;h
in
itl)Ioatl
wt*r( rtG\c~cl
from afar. On<* IhaI lingt.rs in IIIV mint1 was frton a lurkislt naval oflicc,r who IIOI onI) bouplIr Iht- I)ook. ~LII also l)uilI a I)oaI lrom III\ plans. lil~ll ii#i3ill Olin Sl~pht~IlS. lolcl nit how I tic Ercnr.11 tbtiirion was of \alut* lo him on an ins faIntd yacht ticsi,gncr. slxt.Iion
lllr*
scrvtyl
IO brrak
a language-
harrit*I a ficltl
lxYwc*t*n hiiI
Ill~:11tlilr~
a l)uiltlt*r.
niubl,
.lhirigs
htx~au~- in SO sm;tll
UIlfOrtLlllillt~l~.
ortlt-I . Sll
ilb il
As Iimt* wt*nI orl. I he numl~t*r of rqutxIs for Ihtb hook showtd I haI a rt*\,i&m wab in fjo///1lf11/f1it~ IlOW \VI Il.lVC~ ,g .Mtrurrrl/. qain tiont- wirh Ilit- t~nIhu~i3sm of Boris l)I.iIIIt movi~r. a II lioirgh llit7~~
it IlilVt
IOW. I IIiII I WiIS IIOI SO lIi\ll)v wirh his l~rodtling inc~lutlt~S IIrIl( Ot
lht
Oltl.
iIS
Wt.11 a5 It~c~tiniilIIt5
in
inrcrim.
ntw m;tIt~rialS DO noI think building. build tion MY of plans Assuming thr &mrnts The a boat of a drram
I haI Ilao* I)t~t*n accrptcd. IhaI Ihis or any orhrr hope book can Itsac-h all Ihc-rt- is IO know about rewarding. experienced could I Irust Ihal I hi, book. boaring hnd and boaI. br*st I can for is I!) givt- somy guidancr is \erv and desi<gncr. rools. IO 1h0:;c with rhr urgt- IO plus a good will lead IO rhc realizaIhc St-a. with pians and is arm4
non enjov
the1.e is no reason
whv an amateur
X:
BOATi3UILDlNGi'WANUAL
Chapte:
how IC)use skillfully During the past two decades, mort b and m)rc people have learned both hand and power tools for household chores and improvements, making furniture, people nlaterial building sets that outbuildings, something to form dimensions curved the and see that and the like, and they often turn out very creditable jobs. Such are good candidates th,lt for boatbuilding. shapes Y~I, many is 1101 all squat-c corners; discourages them. And are turned off by the thought bending wood or other flat when thev look into boattable of offunnecessarily
of making
it usually
starts with a lines plan and the attrzriant are GUIVP+ well, thats that. These people
depriving themselves of a very fascinating and satisfying pastime. Constructing the first boat, however small, is an experience not to be soon forgotten. form Watching provides done, a hull hours grow from flat paper vessel is a source is often through the years. to learn States, advantage for books boat the hull until courses boatbuilding principally are located have been in ttre Northeast so that opportunity able to and to the I of drawings after of great and pride flat material day. to the builder. into a shapely When the job is And unlike a boat is used of fun and is super which people parts theraI,y a stressful
the finished
of furniture, of lucky
put in a corner
and dver for plrasurca courses in various Unfortunately. of would-be the craft, purpose so there of this
with the desire of the United can take reason is to introduce from starting
the great
boatbuilders
by explaining
elementary
problems
involved
dont purport to teach all the skills of an expert boatbuilder. It is impossible to coker briefly all the information needed boat. deal If you are fortuna:.e from observation. enough When to live in a boatbuilding down to building area, it comes
the kind
--L
\i 1,
. \ ; -. $ s \, : !I 9 .-----L
/I 3 2 L z 3 .. g, r= s 3 z : 2 2 -T c <
-F
L; ,/I ,I 2 d 5 J i i k 2 iJ ti
-, i i
GE.VER.41.
FLAT BOTTOMS
5COWQEt
ALGE
AFL
i3OiTQt.l
VEE.
f3Tl-TOMS
L~c.,u~HIN~ j +.-&AE
DEEP \/EE
OOMLE cw hrJE
ROUND
BOTTOMS
i,\ 1) J&J/l
~A1Llt.I~ -ucJl-OLT ROAT DIt.IGUf I&TEL +IL~oAT
IcigurtbI-1. .St,t,t/fJ//s ftl ttf/tl/t.//q/Il fB/ /YlJltfl/ /lrl/ I rllrd rr~rrlrtttlrtltr~ftrtvi trrlll.\ ner would conform you. and When build have frames bent right light detail that in the hull: material. further certain bend the bevel the bending along parts during necessary to have them difficult The
is twisted
in during
process.
a few attempts. or boiling will net for a small on lofting, parts. types hull
be a great
process
Bending tion alone, forward limber Figure discussed ings and The everyone designed
ZliC ,
by steaming
is not restricted
of v-bottomed
on the boat
to fit the shape in the chapter for the various of the there boat, that
of the hull. round.bottomed which are Lines drawings of full-size wide, but is the making far and hull craft. hull drawjust about
l-2 is a lines
merits
argued
will admit
as handsome
as a well-
round-bottomed
Figures l-3 and l-4 show the essential differences between the framing of flat, vee, and round-bottomed hulls. Although the lower ends of the frames in the roundboat are shown to install side. butted them against the keel, it is sometimes extending the number from note possible, that depending make up a in one piece, the deck on one side to
on the other
In contrast,
of pieces
~;lC.2'l~:R.4 I. :i
-FLAT
Bo-?Tm
ygE 4e--q-y.
SaA--
trr~tl
/ht
Itottotttd
ht~tt.\
frame
for a v-bottomed
bodt.
On the other
hand,
frames
;dre spaced
farther
apart
than
in a round-bottomed boat, so the frames are fewer in number. Figure l-5 is a section through a rather normal sailboat of the cruising ocean racing type and for the is :ypical boats, amateurs of either very the so-called of shallow attempt at first enough deep draft. and-centerboard-type recommended helped not become (S) curves and there The on a similat in many the latter being
discouraged
is more
due to reverse
the planking
deadwood.
time needed
be covered
a hull
with developable
a computer
bination of both, and the designer must be content with the limitations of these curves. Figure l-6 shows the lines for a 52-foot hull that was designed with the aid of a computer. This boat was built of large fiberglass sheets: one for each side. one for each
GENERAL
Above:
through
Figure
ty~G-d
1-4.
nrcnnd
Sectiot~s
round-
l1illJ.j / !I1 2 ~I p ; 1 /I11 ( iji 11 I 1-t 4-f Ii/ / I -p- I tc/I1 I! ! t-/ -11 I + P-11: / / 4 ,--IL I(~ 3/ j 1-q i t-t ----I--cIi----
4 I ii 4 ;j I -3
i! I 4 iI !I
TS . ^ 9 e P-4 E $4 S-G -2 2
$ 2 ft
---- _ t k1 11
~ i -I j I I!: ; i / ;
-3 iI -1
La
GENER.4L
R. M. %b-A(LD
PPQfLE
Fiqurc
.\U)./flCl.\.
l-6.
and
a number
of joined
strips
chine surface on each stde. On the other hand. the v-bottomed hull in Figure 1-7 cannot be built in this manner, for there are concave sections in both the sides and bottom. Flat sheets hull cannot successfully be bent in two directions at the same time. Most of the figures principal lines, in th- chapter have been labeled with the names of some of the beginner must become familiar with this nomenclature. while the same the intersection of a hull only but have a designer hulls, resin
and ti
For instance, the top edge of the hull viewed in profile is the sheet-line. line viewed in plan is the deck line. or deck at side. A chine is obviously between draws matters the side and later. the lines bottom of a v.bottomed hull. Other will be exprained For hundreds Since both sides of a boat are usually material the same,
for one side of a hull. of years, now. wood was the primary As this is written, used for building boats of fiberglass-reinforced
are, different
been manufactured for 30 years, and now fiberglass boats dominate the standardized boat market, with hulls and other parts produced in volume from expensive molds and tooling. However, wood is not dead. States Many pleasure and commercial used boats in hulls are still built in the convenof wood in tht: United and elsewhere. Wood is being
f~l~..~I:R.~~l. 9 tional and manner, cold-molded covered and on the outside saturated with resin and reinforced a relatively with synthetic for building fabrics. hulls
that will be discussed farther The techniques of wooden tion of tooling plastic hulls demand of some for fiberglass quality and and mica cabins. is small, in ihe better molded fiberglass When the choice the finish achieved fiberglass
and
boats
that
65 feet and
alloy construction
of the light
because
it provides
of warmth by purchasing
can never
motorboats
usually with plywood quire but reasonable available are full-size cd by the builder Hare fiberglass
planking. Most of these are furnished with beveled parts that recare to set up the frames accurately to form the hull. Also paper patterns and templates for parts, with all the wood providlocal stock. mostly Then there for powerboats, are kits that supply fiberglass hulls. are also available. Here is where an
from hulls,
amateur must be careful to be >:tre that guidance is provided or available to locate comptrnents such as engincss and fuel and watcr tanks. lhr weights of such items must be positioned so the boat will trim and run properly and safely. Some of thrsc hulls can should not bite off more than he can chew. IIC cluite largca. and the atnateur Making ;I kit boat does not give the same sense of accomplishment as building a boat. from scratch, 1~111 the scheme dons make sense for those with limitrd spare time ot for those who want a particular model of boar that is available in kit form. Listings of kit boat manufacturers CZuirfc. In addition, Fi.thc~rmcln. See thr are found in boating magazine ads and in the RrW Owner;) Buym in Nationcll a good number Recommended of fiberglass hull builders advertise Reading at the end of this book.
Chapter
A Set of plans
is needed
for a boarbuilding
project
to build
kit boat. Seldom does one want to build just any boat rather there is an urge to own a certain tvpe, either power or sail, and usually there is an idea about the size suitable for the intended spent Knowledge scanning are ample contacted Boutzng mechanic more they use. There of arrangements sections of what some for study for furttlrx offer are several to make feasible is offered sources sure for various boating for plans, the boat lengths and ample your time should requirements. by be small architect particularly drawings can Molar be on the search the design for a design will meet of boats
can be obtained
of the monthly
magazines. magazines,
These
by the design,
information.
do-it-yourself
of power and sailboat plans that have been run as The pians they make avaiiable arc to a iarger. articles. The same magazines buildt=r, and carry ads for the backyard in some cases Recommended
in this book
under
Reading, lists the names sizes of boats, Another sailboats. Regardless of their
nnd addresses of many naval architects source is the various class associations try to determine whether the plans
who have plans for all for small one-design that interest you are
source,
sufficiently detailed for you to completely understand the vessels construction. It cannot be emphasized too strongly that good plans are well worth their price, because ,7 .. :r cost is but a fraction of the total cost of the boat. The cost of the plans might be considered as insurance that the finished boat wilt be a success. When designers do not draw the profusion of details that the novice builder would like to have, this book should be very helpful in filling in snme of the missing information.
19%
SLOOP
TRITON
==A
4 /;/ B : i
\ \,x
z VEr.5
,.! c%.,NO hMbER 2 C~Ocl lb=-=-+ a 0 ii ?i$, P ,;I( \ \)i y,:\ I*\,; a,. 1(: ;,I\ ti: ( ti; d /; a :, ! , : , II ;, ,: IS IGn ;j 1* *,.5 l1 3.. *j I;\ \ i I!\! ;, . 1, I_ ,/ /- --~- -~~-~~... ; :-vi i 1 ,\ / I .: /
a *
W-Y w. 7 _
OL.5
/ ,;i
\\ \ II 1 \A \,$ 1,
Rudders Figures 2-1, 2-2, 2-3. ThtJw p/am uvrt drnuw by lhr author as part ofTt.e 1948 ikut~ t$ lhl publicalirm. llou~ fo Build writes nrrd appeartd in rhc Fvhruary Lnrgr-scale blwprit~h uvw off&-ed by The Rudderjor ust ) by h o nl t>b uild t rs. Th e a rc hot ~on;.cd fornl nlnl;cs I i1i.q n rt4atirvly simplr boat lo build. (The Rudder, rt$rinled ztvih pt~mi.~sion, )
*; -1 . ., -. ,a /JY ;, A
:r,,;:7-2:;: n-1
_ ---.-r
-.--
L-J
yrrrrui Dihw.ll,r.q L.rnlY.iL __.... I,.a. L0rn-l P L-L . . ..___I. *. ..I, ET -L .-: 0.I
p-6-
SLOOPTRllON~
Nz*wz n.v Rq
Figure
2-2.
14
PLANS
I would
warn
changes reduction
in the hull
lines,
heights Consult
of superstrucperthe designer
tures, before
in unsatisfactory
them,
Plans
Passengers
for Hire six or more fare-paying or, most likely, fishing. be aware that, strict, in the inboats is but you
there is a great number of boats built to carry whether it be for sightseeing, dinner and dancing, building construction Guard. without simple such and The a craft, you should safety, the equipment regulations
an application
of the boat,
If there
is a complete
it should arrangement
is to be started
requirements and lists the plans that must be submitted for approval. offer the book for free, but they can tell you the location of a governthat stocks the publication.
lf
yi;b
3;d+
-r-Lzle--
L...... ..-- ZLt9-6OOP TRITOW ~ONSTRU~ION PLAN a,,..,suGii&R pf mol5L4T 6.4 ,TCWbRD
Figure
2-3.
1 --_
j -- /
.-
---iq
7
4LCTAT~
Chamer
The selection of tools needed to build a boat depends being undertaken, It is best to start with a small craft
upon the type of project that is to get the feel of the work-- the
difference between bqatbuilding and common carpentry. The construction of a simple plywood-planked boat, either as a kit or one started from scratch, calls for a minimum of tools. mer, sufficient. For such saws, One hand a boat, planes, the usual assortment chisels, screwdrivers, may of home workshop a brace and bits, starting tools such as a hama hand drill, etc., is a boat is a number of
item
the amateur
clamps, either the C or bar type. It seems as though one never has enough of these; they really :,re indispensable. The one power tool that is well worth the money in labor saving, even for the simplest of boats, is a % R electric drill. Other hand tools, such as a drawknife, spokeshave. bullnose plane, rabbet plane, and round-bottom plane are out of the ordinary but very handy in the building of some boats. If not on hand, these can be added as the need develops. Essential framing tools for layout a level. tape, work, and useful and not from start to finish, pencil tape that are a 24 carpenters Also essential is a stretches. For making square, dividers, a carpenters be a cloth compass.
rule or measuring
but it should
your own long bolts from rod stock, a few thread-cutting needed. Another handy tool, one that a boatbuilder
justable sliding bevel such as Stanley Tools No. 25 or No. 18. Thi: is used for transferring bevels from drawings to the lumber and picking up bevels in many ways, as you will learn. Needless to say, both is the Stanley holders a short, in a curve, with carpenters is often that curved Surform, two file-like and machinists useful featuring holders, blade. The vises will be used. throwaway wood planes, is round, for curved rasp-like one of and also blades are
15
new kind
of tool that
up in boatbuilding
one of which
a scraper-like
16
7001.S
A 0.
ADlUmABLE
.k?Llobk5
fiEVEL
L\PPED
c-f CLAMP
ADZE
CHIP BAL? AUGER CLAMP
C. %AI=EFDoT
D.
E.
ADIU~-AI~LE
Figure
3-l.
tool.5 ltlrlt
wortzstlo~.
good
in boat work.
The
Surform
blades
cut wood,
plastic,
It takes a lot of fastenings twist drills. latter kind hardwood useless. Thehc even or metal though heats
to make
come in two kinds, they are more the drills boats there
steel and high speed. Be sure to get the because drilling a series of holes in expensive, the carbon steel bits will burn and become These
the smaller
will be some
holes
required
with and without center lead screws. The latare preferred because they make it ter, called barefoot augers by boatbuilders. If auger holes are made with power, a heavy duty, easier to keep a hole on course. slow-turning technique long enough, motor chuck. that a great all be sunk many into wood screws are used in modern drilled drilling holes to enable operations, them there the wood from splitting boat construction. into hardmust to be driven electric drill is a must. them than Some rather builders than and you must develop your own are not like to use a twist drill you must extend smaller an auger. a rod onto If the standard drills
available
by welding
it up, with the extension You will learn The screws To reduce
to prevent
of separate
on the market.
Both of these tools first drill a hole for the body of the
TOOLS screw; screw, gadgets eliminating of available There more sheet shank, some name they the countersink while both have much an then follows drills up by shaping a straight-sided for depth changing in the chapter as might tools drilling drills of hole the hole hole and to take are the head plug.
17
adjustment
of working
Unfortunately, construction
or less the same job. to the profile makes have and one about for these and are cheap drills lengths and equal
look as though two diameters, of the drill pilot can These twist drills completely tear bits, and
to the diameter
of the screw at the root of the threads, to control they when of the hole. hardwoods, in the rhapter similar are sold
is wood thus
of screws.
be burned
to a gimlet,
a hole is to be made
the wood
fastening.
does not
as the drill
One of the traditional tools of the boatbuildpr is the adze. Ihis tool is shaped hoe and is still in use in yards that build vessels with heavy timbers. Boatbuilders ally use the lipped of the blade. skilled learn under The workman, adze, which is a smooth-cutting across tool for working when in the hands the guidance that made workshop anyway, type with curled the grain heavy and, pieces who when adze is used diagonally is a wonderful to the limbs under in the hands
of the inexperienced,
it will be apparerlt mention that start has your been boat your home
omitted need,
ever
go ahead
pensive and can be bought Power tools in the home one of the most useful size. For straight in a small circular cutting lumber than drill, brand, ference quantities One the hull shop.
as you go along. workshop are more rircular while for a table It can and table
common
ever before.
By far
should
be 12 or 14 in will do most jobs A portable for out of in depth electric in a good the difof a luxwhen prevent
saw but does have some use, particularly for cutting for cutouts planking the saw is set to cut out little more As in the case of the %-inch Stick to a good grade lines and better Somewhat labor-saver it helps lines.
also be used
thickness. hatch
openings
is an electric labor-saving
of anything
too.
The
disc sander
is good and
for such
jobs
as cutting sander
down
the seams
of
fiberglass. quality
the orbital
is about
the best,
is used by the pros for smoothing so dont than skimp. is an enormous is an electric by Skil. This but which plane
up joinerwork.
is important of boats
the construction is a lightweight used for smoothing will be said about ability
tools because,
a certain
with woodworking
Sources
for Tools are mentioned below and that are known for stocking a good selection of is, is
for woodworking
metaiworking.
but not everyone knows that they put out a fine tool catalog that order: Here are some others know]! to me, listed in alphabetical I27 Vose Farm Inc., Road, Peterborough, New Hampshire
03458.
Service
Co., 2727 South Mary Strcc:, Chicago, Illinois 60608. 302 Fifth Avenue, New York, New York 10001. (This
ca:alog is so beautifully illustrated it should bc a collertors item.) W.1,. Fuller Inc., P.0. Bax 8767, Warwick, R.I. 02888. (They sell the barefoot wood auger hits shown in Figure :I- 1 .) Wetzler Clamp Co., Inc.. 43-15 11th Street. Long island City, New York 11101. (A manufacturer of clamps only and will sell direct IO boatbuildcrs.) 313 Montvalc Avenue, Woburn, Massachusetts 01801. Woodcraft Supply Corp., (Another house with a nicely Supply, X71 12. illustrated P.O. catalog Box that lowers ones resistance 11200 Menaul NE, to purchasAlbuquerque, ing.) Woodworkrrs New Mexico
Inc.,
14117.
Chapter
Wood rtlmain:;
is ow of the c,asit>st materials a favoritt* of many Not ail woods nrr sui~nblr
out of which
the amateur
can build
a boat.
and ir
proft5sionais.
tIrspirt*
marerials.
for bonthuiiding.
1tit-rt- will I)t%commtn~s OII IIKW kill& tl~a~ have (ltXir;ll)lt qualities sought anal have I he necessary It is beyond our discussions wc~ocl, even when iimite(1 I0 rhe trees found numher
the scope of this hook 10 morth rhan scrarch in rhe llnited 10 the small 01 commonly
dlone,
so I will limit
accepted
boatbuilding
how the lumber is manufactusrri rain woods from boatbuilding dccavq availabltordinary that and shortness
lrom logs. A few reasons for the elimination of cerare brittleness. softness. weakness. susceptibility to of growth. On the orher hand there are rime-tested woods qualities. aimosi but rhese rypes can seldom be found in an every area where boats are built has a yard and the amateur lumber of good needed material quatiry. is advisrd to seek of grade trouble for long hull life. is of little conse-
fully untlers:ands
rile aid of such a supplier lherc should Ihe builder TV. is consideI~ecl.
ht. no compromise
of lumber
of Lumber is formed has much felled and by the angle depends of the annual upon rings with the face of a hoard of the lumber for use in boats. to run is GUI from and its orienThe grains a saw
19
orirntation
in boards
A.
Figure
PLAIN 4- 1.
SAWN
e.
QUARTER
SANM
as shown
in A of Figure
4- 1. -!-his is called
plain
sawing,
and all
but one or two of the boards sawn from the log in this manner are called slash grain or tlat grain. A more expensive and more wasteful method of cutting up the log. B in and the rrsultinp; boards are known as rift, verFigure 4- I 1 is ralicd quarter sawing. tical. or edge-grain boards. It can be seen from Figure 4-2 that a few boards from the nlidtilc clt it plain-sawn iog have rift grain just like quarter-sawn lumber, but the ma,joritv 01 tllr~ I)l;tin sawn boartls arta not tlf3ir;tblr for I~OilI~~llildil~g, as will h showl~.
Seasoning Wood content or more sorption wood for ,tlmost prewnt ,~ny purpose at a11 must be tlricd time or scbasoned to reduce the content wood contains thr moisture as half abthe moisture, When
when thr tree is cut , at which of the log. Ihere and absorption into
the weight
on as much
FLAlh;
SAWN
LOG7
Figure
4-2.
ilOOU
21
point. ot reducing
content
about
25
Seasoning
15 percent,
to whatever
if more
is removed
moisture is taken on. Shrinking or swelling is greatest in a direction parallel to the annual rings, thus slash-grain boards cup more than rift-sawn ones and appear as shown in Figure reducing 4-YA dfter thickness seasoning. width, Shrinkage producing of rift-sawn boards lumber tends more t.oward stability for than with grrater dimensional
tlian flat-grain ones (Figure 4 :!H), and t<br 1hia rcasrjn planking. tlccking. and other boar parts.
is desirable
Thrrt* are two methods used for seasoning wood. and the mention of the merits of one versus the other just might start an argument in the local t)oat shop. There are those wood done who will accept upon I hr only air-dried of the and lumber, pieces. hand. place-d depending right thickrl:*ss a process It is
gt*~lt*rilll~
that
can take several years, accepted that air-dried 1 hate cannot seen this being wait too long of days.
on nutnerous modern
occasionh production
On the other
for material,
in a kiln to be dried
in a number
mus: be done with care. because the normal prodcontent a:;,low as eight percent, v herc,s time has the moisture content (if boat material shown 111th drying mctl~od. with many accepting 15 percent as ideal. sliould he between 12 and 16 ptarccnt, of the lumber .v,,ight when Moisture c~ontent, incidentally, is expressed as ;: pt-rcentage
llldl Itgitl-dlt?iS Of
Drying boat lumber by this nlethod uct of thr kiln wilt have a moisture
cwen dry. Drying surface cessively and in a kiln spcbc-ds up thr t-vaporation of m,)isture, causing fast drying on the slow drving inside, and is said to affect both the strength and elasticity of Lumber during for boats must period. not be too green types of planking the moisture The boat or it will shrink the latter content and check could and PXbe they is to of knots the building nyr must it be too dry or it will absorb condition of wood. moisture
illld
the wood.
swell unduly.
very serious. There are meters must. leave and be used properly These decay. the selection checks,
boatbuilding.
also know
Kinds of Wood In the northeastern this other areas typical other east, choice ings. As a guide, approxitnate moisture 1 give here a list of good weights content. per board woods, together with principal by one inch thick) properties and foot (one foot square at 12 percent country parts was long established part of the United born, the practice ago. and time woods, frames members cedar makes States, where many tike to think available lands, being boatbuilding woods lumber added in certain As a and the in was from to
of using
certain from
native
has proven
the years,
of the country,
of satisfactory
these
in the South,
difference,
with untried
materials
time
.rr be brittle
White Weight
Oak
iItlO~ll
al.2 l~Oll~~llS
(htilty).
I)Uleat)lt~,
stiff,
strong,
and
holds fastenings
tionally well. Easily steam-bent, should be green. not seasoned. ktbcl, stem, dradwood,
(11. ~hd
thus excellent for frames, but for this purpose Also used extensivrlv for all !rackbonr members
white*
oak grows
iI1
?kw
Enghnd.
and
it
is
dxilJln~tic
that the most dtrrablc oak ib from trees felled during the winter when the sit11 is not flowing. (Set- Winter Cutting vs. Summer Cutting following the description of Alaska cedar.) oak. when 11 should it is at be noted here to tind there and white is a much less durable oak. greater than supply white 01 red oak than white lhe red varietv is weaker oak and is to br avoided
aii possible
(metlium).
~oI-
Strong
useful
planking whtn rift sitwtr. Grows it; Oregon, Washington. from which veneer is peeled for manufacture into Logs dre IiligC. Douglas fir is often called Oregon pine. Green fir is often found in IO house builders and this should not be used without further
catering
(Longleaf! 3.4 pounds clamps, deadwood, (heavy). etc. Strong, May very durable, and straight-grained. also as a substitute long lengths Used for in some
for stringers,
if weight
keels,
be available
localities. this.
Has been
reported
but
I cannot
substantiate
Grows
in Southern
United
in Atlantic
states.
-White Pine Weight of which decks because struction. about were in yacht 2.1 pounds used building. clear durability (tight). Genuine seen varieties northern of sailing nowadays. make makes white ships White pine. pine material enormous ago and quantities for laid here
years
often
is mentioned
it a tempting
for inlerior
White
Cedar
Weight about 1.9 pounds (tight). Atlantic white cedar, which grows near the Atlantic roast from Maine IO northern Florida and westward along the Gulf coast to L,ouisiana. is also known strong. moisturetight as juniper. southern white crdar, swamp cedar, and boat cedar. for planking. are especially It is not Soaks up good for 1,111its uniformity r;nt)idty. I;lt)str;lk(* t~lank4 and resistance 10 rot make it excellenr is tow. ho[h of which qualities in and
bum shrinkage
thin. Atmosr always suppliett as flirches. I)arti on I ht. r~tgc*s. I Iic*sc* boat hoards tat)c*r in width sanx- as the tree
Port Orford
Cedar
clear. and srraight-grained. Weight ah0ul Z.-l puntis (iigilr ). Moderarely strong, 1 Irartwcxxi VVI-;C ~c*sis[ant iti rot I!4 for planking and bright finisht*tt decks. Grows in sout I)(,111Orc*gon ;11i(t nor-rllc~ri CI,llifornia anti IS d material familiar to thcb tavman been made. as tht* woo(1 lrtrm wl1ic.h \;ISI rlurnlwr~ 4 vene!ian b!ind s!a!s have ttisrinc~li~~t~ st1ic.v o(t01 thih wood wah scarcch in the tare 1!)7Os. Has a
Red Cedar ahout 1 .!I f)ounAs (lighl). Ilighly rvsisldnl howt ver. 10 rol and is soft and availahltweak. in good widths thus not the htst
1lli.s wood.
Cypress Modvralcly slrcmg. (rncdiuni~. Mcighl at)out 2.X founds rot. Llscd for f)ianking wlww wc,ight is not ;I f;l<.tor hrcausc cxttnl. making for a h<nil\v boar aflt,r a short heartwood very rtxistanr to low
it steaks up water
IO a great
Grows in southern
swamplands
States.
If you wani
to use cypress
in a boat.
fmd a supplier
who understands
Sitka Weight
Spruce about strip 2.4 pounds from because under northern believe (tight). lengths spars Moderate make shrinkage, it ideal to Alaska. have proper there are Not care. high strength for its weight, Coast in 10 rot, resistant
in long, clear
for spars.
Grows on Pacific
California it or not,
when construction.
always
Spruce
(Northern
White) High strength for weight. not very resistant to rot. where weight-saving is the primary consideration.
Weight about 2.4 pounds (tight). Used for deck and hull framing Grows in New England.
Mahogany 3.0 pounds (medium). This Islands is the market that name material difficult Holds for woods known as and and is it is true and is the
about
laucl~l and
tnn~llr
used for planking ior planking 10 finish fastenings than well importer. prefer for color and grain
iis qualiiies.
and seconds
the more
Mahoganies varies from medium used for planking. than more and expensive. finish to heavy. exterior Honduras material. Honduras, finish, Mexican, and interior mahoganies, to and African joinerwork are better Abeking and mahoganies of flile yachts. looking, Rasmussen easier firstnf
the so-catl?d
Philippine
or Mexican According
mahogany
is a favored
of some of the finest yachts in the world, suitable iz~orcnsis. Sipo utile, Sapeli aboudikro and Niangon they should be acceptable to anyone. In the that there are other kinds of African mahoganies it is a case of dealing with a reliable supplier of
past Abeking and Rasmussen stated that arc riot suitable, so here again woods.
WOOD Teak Weight durable. The States equal. wood dulls White Weight durable. desirabtp. for sailboat about 3.5 kind pounds is grown (heavy). Not as strong moisture or Thailand trim. finish Teak that, as people and thus decks think. but extremely shrinkage.
25
oil that
excludes
acceptable
in Burma
Worms
are not fond of teak, so this in case some of the toxic a gritty it. substance that
is often used to sheath bottom tools quickly, Ash about Used 3.4 pounds for deck and
anti-fouling
(heavy). beatns
Straight-grained. and
strong boat
and
very is
Suitable tillers
Hackmarack Weight durable. about Only 3.1 the pounds roots, (medium), from which also natural called larch arc or tamarack. are Tough used and
crooks
made,
for boat-
for small boats and knees are cut from rhc-se crooks. On rhe other and R;~sI~~ss~~~ once told nit that larch was tht-ir sc:ctmtt choice mahogany) fclr planking.
Cedar ahout 2.6 pounds to decay. is bright (medium). Minimum where Straight-grainrd. shrinkage usually moderately strong. heartwood
resistant
it is grown, sapwood
when seasoned. Good for planking and southeastern Alaska to southern Oregon. narrow.
fkartwood
yrttow,
Summer
Cutting
Cutting oak it was noted the most that in the opinion wood comes Material, winier-cut of most. from if not all, of in the in Navy paragraphs
In the remarks the old hands winter: Wood: Bureau An than therefore
durable
trees felled
of a jolt to come
durable that in
is based
on the erroneous
assumption
26
L1001)
the sap is down, while tests have demonstratt-d as in summer. sound by insects felling, objection and and only
the sap is up, in the living standtng trees contain is that precautions, methods, about
tree.
Ac-
lumber temperatures
if left exposed
Reasonable seasoning
the danger
to summer-cut
material.
vs. Weight a comparison of strengtlis with is of interLast, the woods mentioned the weight pound3 per board foot again above are listed
in order
of strength,
shown. pOU&S
Cypress Sitka Port White White Western spruce white c-<hda~ cedar pine red ct*dar about wood acquire spruce Orford cedar Northern Alaska
2.8 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.6 1.9 2.1 1.9 the CVood listed
more
U.S.
Department
of Agriculture.
ASS
Design
Stresses for Wood of a few c:f the foregoing the American counterpart woods are listed in the Huks /or LSuilding and of the American of Shipping. Bureau ABS specifies
t.lns.\l~g Kt~lrrfi)rwtl
that the wood be of best quality, well seasoned, clear, free of defects adversely affecting its strength. and with grain suitable for the purpose intended, and lists allowable tlt-.~grr .\[rc\.st~J in pounds per square inch as follows:
Est ronl(J
SptTitJs
Ash, whit< Cedar, Alaska Fir ~ Douglas
27
Plvwood Panels items awaited composed that werr of layers of wood veneers to be protected and from glued together but wet-e used for man): years for their use for marine adhesives. manufacturers There supc~rstructure5 This purposes touched gone for inbut mostlv have
line building
for limited-
and it is extensively
tcsrior joinrrwork in hulls of all construc.tion types. Being made of thirl layers of wood srrurcly bonded are stiffer panels, than boartls of equal thickness even for solne parts weight and sailb;,;?ts lot of time. Although plvwood tion. of boats made a matter can br savc~i and working
panel5
dntl have advantages over regular lumber, rompletelv of wood. Due to t hc* st iftness of plywood that can be of importance* of a number in both powerboats pieces can save a a hull with instead of small
with panels
it is not theoretically
possible
to plank
panel5
As nit-ntioned above.
t ht. designtar llas speciallv 2, plywood CdnnOt curvature. that found the bottom this.
shaped the hull for such construcbe bent in two direc:ions at once to in reft~renctI:) the exceptions arc-bottomed (~l,tmp5 and fastrnand get the notion pl;rnking
IOti1lttl
has compound
However
of certain
that it should be planked with plywood. wise, check with him first to see whether major heartbreak. Plywood each other, alwavs plywood,
cven though the designer has specified otherit is feasible. This procedure may save you a
is made by laying up thin layers of wood with tile grain at right angles to and the number of layers is always cldri so that the <grain of the face plies is The number might of plies have and their thickness are important. thicker Cheap inner k ply. for instanct-. two thin faces ant I a relatively
parallel.
MOOD a better weak grade when will have five plies of wood, with right angle kind bent parallel to the grain paneis. e,ch of about the is made fogs are ply. of Douglas placed thickness; difficult a paint fir.To oband suffiis at its is used in a lathe to tame finish equal thickness. panel It
readily
be seen
that
three-ply
will be
of the inner
and inexpensive for making edge that called paini become finish. greater is exposed plywood wild grain,
the grain
for a smooth
worst whe;l
tht plywood
in interior joinerwork, checking Such checking can be alleviated ing, turers. using ;I f,lywood sealer Fir f,lywootl is acceptable
to achieve a first-class paint job. the fir with a sealer before paintpaint or plywood laminates manufacone such as is to be covered plastic with either
matfe
of the modern
Formica. It can also be used for planking and decking that thetic cloth. such as fiberglass and resin. Plvwood for any purpose in a f)oar, whether for planking should f)e of nlarine grade. This guarantees that fjroof adhesive, that a minitnum number voids in thrs inner f,lir3 are minitnal. of patches
the veneers
Plywood Previous
Grading ctlitions of this book carried data furnished Champion rrsuftcd before. by a large Building This marine Products. plywood Asking
Corp., than
of eben more
is a for of plywood
around
of horrible
Mat-inc.-gratis plvwood panels art laminated with waterproof phenol-formaldehyde or rc*sorc.incll glut>. anrf th:, fac(* f)lics are all grade A veneers. while there is a choice grade A or gracfr H backs. B. detail, although there is little you can do ;tf,out what is produced including ~lhertb is also a choice of either Douglas fir or fauan ior(*s. tlot h gratltb todav.
of for
Cfertb is ;I I)it morr masinlum 4 x 8 pantbl. suf~erimf)ost~d. Marine A-A and plywood A-2. (An
Kf*f);tir5 in ;I gratlc* A ~;I(x, art limitt~cl IO ninc* in ;I -I x K-foot panel. 01six vtbnecr f)atl.ht*s. Intchrs 11~ panel cores art of grade it: a ~gratle I3 back are limited B I~ougfas fir or fauan.
a in a than
to eighteen
with no more
four (ori* gaf)s in any ply. with (ore gaps not to exceed panels rotary art offered grades means the back Durapfy in the following
$ , and with none of t hesr gaps types: marine fir. grades A-A
lauan.
A-A panel
A-A and A-2; and marinr ribbon fauan. grades both sides are of the same grade of the same plv is of B or ;I? grade of the same species.) panel with a paper like resin-impregnated This panel is good for bulkheads and partitions
species; A-R ot- A-2 indicates Champion has a marine CrrZon overlay
llOI)l)
29
lhr fat-? VCntcrs untft-r- the trvt-rlay arc* pdich-frcc as Lgratfr GIS.
rotar\l
fauan.
f)ac k. Optionally.
wiLlI a C:rvZon fact, (II? qratft* B fir and C1 rofarv or thv ventbcr ulltivr I~W C:rc%c,n <an I)c f)ouFlas fir, f,ur of the fir tan usuaffy fly dtzrcclrtf rflrough a paint
as mrntionvcf
fini5fl. .fhr m:lrlrlcs ttbak f>an(*fs matfv teak grain vrnrer) variarions fjfain-slicvcl wilh snlalf lcbak
indications
cut niatchcd for color and afic,:>rctf. <;r;l(fy A-.,j is used when ,A- 2 is availahfv witi) a choice of
as float.
rnatc~rials.
ChilIll~S~t~Il.
All0ltlt~l'
:lIlti
rflroughout
1IOWtVlI
f~fvwooti.
concxr11 tflal
for \va~c~rf,roof marinr-gratfc carcvcyf I0 f)o;iIf)uif~f~*rs ov(*r tfjcs yy;irh is -ffltb kfarBaf~inlc)l-t~ , Marvlanti 2 1230. lrv Harbor forot!lcrwisr. .ff~cv usually carrv il Dutch-made th.~l is superbfv nla(fr, aff)eit ;1 flit t)rl the heavy
onfv
SOI::~~
her SillC~~comparlv.
~11 spccim of fmnt~fs fir, mafrcjgany-like: ~la11c.l ~all~i 4th.. Plywood Panel Sizes
fflf- lolfowinq ih 01 f)fvM.()o~f f)CIntf sin-s tiic,;llc-ti II? *) ;Intf Ifarf)or Salt3 (intfic~arcd fq
il rill)lC
in illt.ht3
;Iv.lil;if)ft-
Iron1 (:h;imf)itrn
(iri-
i ).
IciH*
ItiX* I!)P* .I()*
144*
? (:PpIy) (i-f+)
, (7 p!y) 48 s !?(i* -
,( (7.f,fY) 48 s wi*
,Varirrc I,, (3.[IV) Kihtwll l.nucltr
4x x Lx*
, (5.]I?) , (5.fjly)
SO
II 001)
Special Both
sviclttls
anti
iiar bar
Salts\ 0ftc.r 10
malit.
p,snrl:;
in sites
other
than
stock.
mentions for instance. and ll*ngths ot Sti whmt* topsiti~* l,lanking r,l H,
thick in increments of $,,. panels fr-on! b !o I IL (A friend of mine built several hundred hard-chine t on4stc .a C1ti! ;i single otfcrs with panels width, pant.1
on
each
l+;trt)or start5
a maximum
Exterior
Grade
hut L I huffi< icllt nurnhc*l c~f failures. rt-c~orclt~d. Bwaus~ of this. the use ot c,xrt-r.ior grade
~lh\ol~/(,l~ c,t,rfo/n that the panels ar,- made with truly waterproof glue, that all voids arc pluggc~l hv the- bui!dcr IO prevent the entrance of water, and that the weaker conSIIEC tion iniltbrc.llt III I hc lesser number of plies is suitable for the job. All in all, con>,idc-ring rho tr~~mt~ndous amount ot troub!e that could be caused by failure of this ~I~~JVO()(~ lnatc~rial. thta hc,.~thuiltlt~r is ativisc:l against gambling his labor against the \,l\in,g iI1 lllq\t(-l-i.il ~051 ,gainerl i)v 1tI(. us( ot f.xtcricn gra(lt-
Cutting
IhIt. IO
Plywood
[Iit* rtiili 4;lwtYl \t-ntt-t\ th,l: Ilidkt
utl .I
I).41~c~i
hitIt* w ht.11
,~nct
Figure
4-4.
1lf~Ol~
31
on the be made
this much
Cuts
portable
of plywood
to the edge
parallel
Bending
Plywood
Plywood can be bent to curvature either dry or after it has been steamed. If the latter method is used, the panel must be dried before another part can be laminated IO it. Sometimes it is advantageous to dry-bend two panels eat-h of half the desired finished a dry thickness. The following chart panel wi!l take. Pant-l thickness is a guide (not the gospel) to how much and bending radii are in inches.
,J cr0.n Cirnitr
I ,,I 2 I I, I!
bend
P~~mllt~l to
(;rclill
60 72
(W)
24 4 3fi
(0)
1: , II
7 Wi 144
he used cure
in hoat at room
of the availability
of watt-t-proof
that
allows curved
with minimum
waste of material
can be made of small pieces of wood readily obtained and easiiv antI str,il) l)lanking as tit*sc~riI)t~(l latc*r art- t)ottl form5 01 \v(N,;I
ilrt'
parts laminating and so arc ho;low spars. Laminated thtb time that must be taken to prt*pare the form and strong, particularly beams. are tnuch laminating laminated that solid sue-h as deck Laminations although an assembly would have
cheap
tluc to are
thr
wood asst~mblies of parallel grain construi~tion. ross grain in them if sawn from solid stock. and split than of the non-laminated
wood
ICS:; likely
to check
a1111
itself. than
of ot
if it were made
solid pieces jointed in the conventic,nal Builders with an interest in laminating for laminating to a lamination, parts that otherwise either strengthwise
at conr,oc.ting
forms
be inferior
3 . 9 L
11001)
Fi,gure series
4-4B shows the lamination one piece of wood. is fastened in place is shown
A part
The shape
stock or plywood.
Fir plywood
$, thick,
which
is available
deckhouse roof corners. rockpit coaming corners. and the like. D is a sketch of a form used to ,gluc up right- and left-hand parts with twist, such as the bulwark rails at the bow of a boat No matter in all forms: glued Ihrrt~ have how the form the form must being is constructed. be covered there is one thing paper that must be remembered it from that becoming be with waxed to prevent
10 tlte part
laminated. of the lamination easily. prior strips except they must thin, shape If they are not sufficiently to clamping. you will
is no rule for the thickness to take the required time holding them
in place
I,umber
and Plywood in long enough llat -scarphs Iry hand lengths for the jot; at hand, shorter
luml~c~
(a11
is nc)t ol~tainal~lt~
with a ratio of Ic~t1gth-t(~~thickt~c~ss of 8 or Ilowevet in Figure 4-h. and a similar . scarl)t1ing a wide plyput out by the boat L&1!; City. alike. Michigan in the As shown
with a rig as shown with a routet-. espec-ially 706 and slartin a toot caiteci Inc.,
tbc*cfc~\,&t~ct to cl0 t tits plaiting 01 two sc,trf)tis. firm is incleed Consc~quentlv Brothers.
a lot of f)atience.
to the amateur
is an attachment for a portable circular saw. it is said to cut a clean sc-arph with a single pass
Sources
prcrblem
IlIt*
~Cl~~t~itist~lll~~IltS
of supplirrs
,~fl~r(J~I(L/
such
1s i2c~JtlcQrt Rf>cit,
Co111panv.
f-/:\/lf~~~tWIl.
COIK~CJI~
258 Ferris
Avenue,
White (long
New York
for as long as I c-an remember l-hey Hart-a white oak. teak. and cypress,
plywood!). is John
have always had a stock of fir. mahogany. as well as plywood. Company. mail Tampa. cnder. Florida 39 West 33601. \Vctod & Supply ad mentions C.;cnuc. Rome
19th Street,
In the Snutheast,
of the needs
IIOOD
33
4-5. WINI wish to l)uil(t rt4 c.rclar. iI colti-molded for Douglas Lompnv. woodcn fir. hull (mart* grain ;tt,out this method vertical spruct~. Ort-gon grain or red in good
97030.
art fortunatt~
In vtnrer vt=rtical
stc)rk,
eirhtbr Silka
whit~h is similar
mahoganv.
.Ihis marcrial
is scockrd
Figure
out jiirm, joints by
4-6.
the
The
put scarph
Gougc~or~ Brothers
vs~mplifie.~ in plywood
34
lI:OOL)
Prevention
of Wood Decay of decay that is to select woods that have proven durable in to be of
The first step in the prevention boats, and it should is caused moisture rot, Decay present by fungi certain content
be remembered
that the heartwood feed on the cellulose of moisture, Wood that be on the order is continuously
For the fungi . The 75-90 degrees air present. There cabin.
to grow,
conditions must
wet does not rot because of building just waiting of some to avoid
leaks in deck and temperature precautions are toxic to and they then apand of
decay These
cheap,
was copper
naphthanate;
ftt~,rted, All 01 I hesc art* ~tld under It-oni sulrlrliers. the experience
miirilw
Although
dnd wood-tit~stroyitig
such container
deck beams,
and the
Scantling The ciimensions itibtanct. thickness, beams dimension, a list keel of the hull of scantlings depth and dimensions timbers width, in wooden the stem width. boatbuilding sire and and are called scantlings. For
includes
spacing
sizes of clamps,
may be given
as the siding,
and the molding. usually a vertical dimension. As an example of this, referring to Figure 12-l A, a deckbeam would be sided I t, and molded 2 th , while a clamp would he sided 1 t*j and molded 4 . The dimensions of frames are an exception to the above. ship dimension the builder quickly because becomes the fore-and-aft size. The adjusted dimension terminology to its usage. is the siding, is peculiar and the athwartand is the molded to boatbuilding.
It has been noted that quite a few designers, apparently tiring over the years of hand lettering the words sided and molded* on their drawings. simply abbreviate these words to S and M. This could be very confusing to the first-tirr,er. but now you know.
Chapter
Wood
material it can
and
it remains However,
so because depending
of
the- relative
be worked
by the beginmar.
materials
to be considered,
Wood When covering should planking, changes, quite leaks worms covering
and
Fiberglass hull resin Normal construction and fiberglass carve1 type, is suitable, or other there such is much cloth. doub!e and there The to rt=commend hull with planking diagonal moisture is made
be of a stable
such as strip planking, planking to crack. to the hull. adds strength, and hulls swells However,
or triple
plywood.
shrinks
with fiberglass,
of water,
protects
that can be brought in the design, of the covering. anyway. The fabric The resin can
l-he weight
can be reduced
does not count for much and Dyne1 are also used. expensive and more
fiberglass polyester
or epoxy.
is more
35
3G E-IHER~~l.ASS A ND OlIlk:R lI1 I.I. .21.4 7k.RI:II..5 time-consuming wood is superior. Covering covering when sanded Huils is also recommended in cabin work edges covered sides. for plywood etc., decks. cabin tops, and the like, and the to the builder joints can be of strain of joints to feather are oitcn to prevent is to be painted rather and made invisible boats. wtth %O-ounce leaks is a genuine boon than varnished. Taped d paint cloth. cloth per square polyester want finish. doubled is often Lil areas used to cover verby one layer of cloth and be to use, due to slower cure at room temperatures, but its adhesion to
the joined
such as at the chines tit-al cabin such covering, Anyone there stance, stripped, stronglv New because
ho011 attc*r to
To give you an idea of the weight of 2.25 ounces will sooner must be taken be dry. must cioth. both including
added resin.
foot for IO-ounce to cover old wood, All old finish hull, cover,
and doul~k t tlis for 20.ounce who clabbles are certain the boat prt-cautions must
or later
must
cltxaned
In the case of a plywood weeks before be used ovet covering. the heads and smoothing
for in-
and the wood allowed to dry for several 1-t-commrnded for old wood.
wood
must putlv.
11o1
they will he sottent~d by the resin. or makts ;I mixture produce lhe consistency
USC.
cracks
of t*l)oxy resin
of putty.
years I~rlentler
lntiusrries. selt*c.tion
Inc.
has catered
ot p0)vestc.t
WJO~.
lhe address
Molded
Fiberglass
Hulls
prcduwtl
.lhtb shiny,
1110Itl.
commerciallv
fiberglass
hulls
are
usualiy
made
from
a female
lhis rc-quit-es that a wooden male IJuiltIing iI wooctI~11 hull, using stripplanking hull shape. When lht- plug is tlwn covered for every blemish is finished glass cloth and as desired.
plug 1)~ made, just as though you were or l~lywood. whichever is suitable for thtand when resin and is worked the female so that mold the female to a very is made. will not until a
is applied resin
stick
s1r011g.
it. Ihen
rigid molt1 has been made. Rather than hold the molds shape, the shell is rt-inforr-ed 011 wood anti sometimes vertically, steel. If a particular is made hull withdrawn the mold to split
relv entirelv upon shell thickness to the outside with a nerwork of rough shape is such that it cannot be on the centerline.
Some builders decrease the time needed to build stiffness into the mold by using sandwic h construct ion. After 1.I or so of fibrIglab% hd> brrn laid up against the plug, they use a core materiai such as end-grain balsa, followed by more fiberglass. The mold stiffness is thus increased e-reatlv bv soreadine the rrlass skins aoart. the core
FIBERG1..-1SS.-I IV-II OTHER Hl1.1. M.-ITERIA LS material flanges. When plug, beam than acting in much mold the same manner as the web of an I-beam of a hull or steel, When has been larger that separates removed from than
the female
for the production and any blemishes disc of wood near and makes a partial
are repaired.
ing up a hull.
Sometimes
to the mold
each end so the mold resin. the hull of time the builders the work mostly by hand
the amount
you can stay out of the sticky the hull will be made
by laying
with roller and brush. When hulls are produced glass fibers can br applied with specialized spray strong The as those laminated high g!oss finish of fiberglass on the outside cloth. of molded
in large quantity. resin and chopped equipment, but these hulls are not as hulls or other simiiariy cortttructed
parts of the boat results from first spraying a gel coat of resin on the surface of the mold. The gel coat can be of any color desired. and contrasting stripes at the waterline and other accent stripes can be sprayed as well when you know what it is all about. After the gel coat has been wovtw roving and choppt*d llow ble, does one make Watching not available? thrrc has been applied, the hull is laid up with fiberglass fabrics known as strand mat until the nectassary thickness hrl+ been reached. and lay up a fiberglass do these boat things industry hull if detailed instructions are is the best way, but if this is not possiOne book, iLfnr/rrc* Dc~.\/~I~Mnuul,
a mold others
for many I years. and now there are other hooks on tIrt* market writrcbn with the bt*ginntt. in mind. lh~ laminate (It*t;tilitlg the* c.omposit ion of rho tiberglass hull laminate. such sc~hcvllll~* int;)rmation as thcb wc$$ir lined anal tvpe of glass reinforcement, of the boar. laminatc~s. .Is experience l)ut guiclancth nunlbcr is Rained. of lavers, etc. in rhr Plans the builder should be out mav develop his
of the tiberglass
One-Off
Fiberglass
Hulls
would tn spend P. 0.
along time
and and
out
a not
Box 13704,
NVW Orleans.
only devised
a method
patented
con-
sists of parallel rods made of fiberglass-reinforced polyester continuous roving, with each plank being held together of Itghtweight, The molds the hull open-weave method stiffener! upside sag between fiberglass is fairly down. cloth. simple. The A hull strips must form construction and sometimes must be built will not
alternating with bundles of by a webbing of two layers is framed with sectional Obviously the C-Flex of the
planking
spacing
varying
the weight
38
Figure
(lwrrrg
5-l.
hdti
:I roll
ill plw
lurrl
dower.
.Volr*
tlttrt
tlrc
rrgr1rrr,\t
icvtltI~s
OII(
hiti
ri,rr,tll,,.
rior4fu
wrlrvi~
hy I(.( ptlk\I
(iT( cYrrc~/rlIIy
/rrltt(~d
C-Flex. The C-FIvu. molrts and c,c,nforms rountl-l)nttomett c-ach aclditional v-bottom~~tl sheer and,
which bends lon<gitudinally and sideways, is then laid over :he On the framework for a IO the hull shape with little itting. hull tI 1 planking is usually; shape<- *<)the sheerline and secured: then 5-1). For a plank is simply butted to the .djac ent width (Figure is applied to the chine and the covering the frame is continued has been to the to the centerline. When completely
covered with the C-Flex planking it is wet out with resin, either polyester or epoxy, and t htsti l~ttIlill;ltiOt~ is contiriut4 with c~onventional fitWrgliIss miltc~rials until the desired t hic.kness has been reach~-d. the C-Flex is very strong in the direction of the foot, is 12 wide, and Like any similar conto have a fair layinformation condetailed known 13~ the nature of its cwttstruction,
rods. It is made in two wc+ghts. 0.33 and 0.5 pounds per square conits in lerigtlis of 100 and 250 rolls. or any length to order. struction, up and about One-nff the amount the C-Flex degree fiberglass of finishing of smoothness to anyone hoarbuilders time depends desired. upon Seemann furnishes interested in the method. use a technique
construction
frequently
as sandwich
struction, where thr laminate consists of a core between fiberglass skins. This type of construction has several advantages over single-skin construction. Probably the biggest
ratio.
A sandwich
laminate and
number
of laminations,
with a lightweight with options: single-skin hull and weight skin; stiffness. additional is hulls con. of or he
of the sandwich
is not much
single skin. Ihis fact offers the designer who uses sandwich construction he calI krzp thy same thickness and weight lanlinate as for a similar and can
VI;;I
hull;
the glass skins and use a sandwic.h than Other benefits. minimized
equal
stiftncxs
weight,
Ihc interior
or non-rxistcmt
slmcx.
in a sandwich
insitiv
ison
ttappcns
that
should
is wltat
tht. w,lt~:rlinc~
e:~nt that the hull is punctured, particularly under Iti s1tc.h (.ir~utnst;Itl(.tl;. the single-skin hull will admit water, but this is
in thr
not so of a sandwic.h hull unless both skins and the core are punctured-something that ad~oc.;itrs of san(lwic.h construction feel is unlikely during the normal life of a boat. ,ig;tiilzt It totlrn\s. ot t.ourbc. that
skin
should made is
.I%(- tcpit
difficult
singIt* \kitl.
in which
is to be repaired
in the same
~ttu~:tc~~l. OIlit-IMGW-. rhc- (l;ltn;tg~~i section of thr outer skin is ground away ~i1)1-St4i\,t. 11~~1~.It..it tic-rcbrl ilit0 t IIt* acliacc-tit unilatn;igc~l skin, and I he void is filled Iil)c%rgl,las .ln(l tt4tl thts S,I~H~ as for single-skin hull, a framework tibrt-glass repair. molds .II~ I)uil(l ;I 5atldivic.h of transverse section
and longitudinal
strips (usunllv ( allc :! r-ibbands (jr Ijattens) is needed to define the shape of the hull. and it tn;lkt*s st& to build upside down. Figure 5-2 shows the forward end of a male mold for an X6-foot powtarboai hull. I Ising loam (or-t- as a:~ c~x;tnipIr. foam sheets are fitted against the mold (using a the foam pliable where necessary or using contoured core heat lamp to makt matc~rial instt-atI) atltl held in place with nails driven through plywood scrap washers until
tnold
tht. foan~ (at1 t)t- held in place into thta foam outsi& skin (Figurts is t-equired
through
the ribbands
workmanshi~~ the
a complete bond between the core in the bond will hasten delamination of the to deflect there strength investigate between bond fails upon supports between and this will is a good the skins and for that
the core itself. For this core materials impact and upon
the available
use in boat Ilulls. Obviously. a material does not absorb water is desirable.
resists crumbling
40
Figure
Note>
5-2.
how
FOAM\ //
I ( i i t I i : ? / h i
Figure
5-3.
41
Some
iiircu
popular
100 perrcnt polyvinyl chloride loam), marketed in the U.S. Inc., 12.5 Sht2ridan Icrracr, Ridgewood, New .Jrrsey 07450. cell foam, partly %oley polyvinyl St.. wood), chloride), Texas manufactured 7605 1. Corp., by Baltek Grapevine. manufactured 07647.
hlrgt~c~~ll (closed
Cotttourkorr
by American 10 Fairway
in balsa
New Jersey
go into all the construction details, but suffice it to say that while the hull is down the nutside fiberglass skin should be smoothed to the extent desired to work downhand, manufacturers hull can is a trying skin is added If you wish more supply procedure because information the shell to complete on sandwich is quite limber the, core a cored you with it. the sandwich.
it is still possible
fiberglass
to the laminate
One method used by several builders of hulls 5-5. This involves the use of a holding cradle the hull as it is overturned is completed. Although be produced the aforesaid hulls. before is a one-off It is a matter mold fiberglass changed and which
with Airex foam cores is shown in Figure fitted to the upside-down hull to support of the boat
the hull sits in while the construction method of hull construction, to calculate molds that Female
the mold can be how many have been hulls can built for a sandwich
of economics
a female
is justified.
42
CARPET
STR\fS
f=\=e-
GLA4$Ep
-R
HULL
Figure
5-5.
Steel When pensive worked you stop to think when rornl~ar~*d to almost about with it, steel is a remarkable other desired. metals, and with ease Ihe relative material. proper it is strong, equipment, pieces very inrxit can be by electric
any shape
of joining
welding makes it a suitabltx material fashioned riveted construction. One rosion protect advantage by sea water. steel against Fortunately. corrosion, hut (and
for small craft with a saving in weight over olddisadvantage of steel is its low resistanre to corhave brought must construction about improved coatings to An botthe coatings aluminum be tcrnstantly maintained.
the years
of steel construction
tom integral fuc*l and water tanks ran be built in, using larger capacities to be carried than in wooden hulls. Steel is not a material for too long for the average beginner 1 can remember two good-sized auxiliary
the hull for one side, enabling but without of steel built reflecting by people
who had not built a boat before. However, the necessary equipment. The worst fault the hull plating, did it again and both builders would the hulls
they did have metalworking experience and of these boats was the humps and hollows in they had gained experience so that if they
said that
not be so rough.
Rough plating of steel hulls is often disguised by skillful application of trowel cement, probably because it is cheaper to do this than to expend the labor needed to smooth the plating by heating and quenching. The roughness of the plating is caused
l~~lHt:K~~I..-l.sS .l.VI) 1)771t~;KII1 1.1. .ll:I 7l~:HI:~l.S -IS by stresses ser up when sequence of higtler of welding strength Even though welding the plating to the frames research can be built and one plate 10 another. have invented today rhan The
Aluminum
Alloys
aluminum
alloys, These
for- boalhuilding.
notably alloy 5086 in rhe United States. are alloys are relatively high in strcngl h and corrosion A fair amount supply of rhis meral the increasingly vessels. weight weight. cannot over rhar of steel. or the possilasts well but speak aluminum in speed. is consumed by large fleet of
welded. and
huildrrs.
but bv far rhe most of it is used IO build platform reduce terms. alloys of aluminum speed
the carrying
deadweight
t~1a~5 in atltlition
and runabouts of aluminum are made I)rotluct- 2 large part or ;1n enrirt- hdlf 1~-;111svirst~ or tongil utlinal ~rrircrio~i. Atulliinulil Lramiiig t~c~nstrut~tion
0~1
is used
plaling
is nio~t- t,sl)t*nsivt-
onlv tlot~s IlIt* atunlinunl ilst4t CXN more pt.r INNI~~I than ~~t.t~l, rl~e ,tt.(u;tl welding IO~I~ IIIOII-. ihis mortb than m,lkt-s up for the fact rhar rhe wt+.$lt of aluminum volved in a particular project will always be less than the weight
Manv builders of steel boars have converted 10 aluminum construction with little need to change cquipmenr rsce11~ for welding, but like steel. it is not a nlaterial for the bt*ginnt~r. 011~ very imptlfi~~rtn~ problem area encc,un~rrtd with aluminum construction is galvanit found when be t,c)rl.osion. Ihis octurs as sea cocks, hull is exposed the methods for the boat. manufacturers hetwern the aluminum shafts, hull rutitlcrs, currcrfts and etc.. dissimilar metals in sut.11 fitrings the aluminum and prt)pt-llers, anti also occurs in anchorages. This can the marine departments
to stray electrical
~~JtYtWltVi.
for doing
can
Welding ant1 the preparation of the finished surface are also areas that require care. Welding aluminum is quite different than welding steel. It is imperative that weld areas be absolutely clean if good welds are to be made. If you are in need of information about welding. comes IO painting coating aluminum hull rakes aluminum should the aluminum manufacturers can provide assistance. When it the surface, rhe marine paint makers have special systems for and instructions for cleaning it before coating. The highest quality
a lot of labor: a really smooth yacht finish on the topsiJes of a welded yacht hull requires fairing of the surface with fairing compounds. which for quite a while.
stay in place
J-1 t~Il~t*~t~(~I.-Iss .-I,YI) C)7/lt-X III .1.1. N.-t 71:K1.41..~ Ferrocement Every now and ment. terlaced embedded taken struction Essentially. with wirr, then there with is a wave of enthusiasm consists cement applied abdL-t cl=nstructing of concrete the steelwork that great heavy weight hulls of ferrocereinforcing rod inis completely care must be of the con-
the system
of a framework
to it so that
to eliminate
did not carry some menof designers does A decade later there
hulls
were a number
to be any mention
at all, an indication
the method
enthusiasts
had broadcast.
Exotic
Hull
Materials a number than of matt+als and developed recently that have higher strengths
Tht-re have been and this lower arts weights is bound fishing
wood
liglttw4ght strong
timc*s stronger
and
strtmssc4 areas of racing sailboat hulls. It is three S glass, which is twice as than stt-cl. I.ike~visr. wltirh the standard boatbuilding glass fabrics Kevlar fabric, material. are made tllan is steel. high.strrngth
as the common
matlt-. is muctl stronger and tram I)upont aramid tihers. F2sotic, materials as compared Now, plywood tion of rc~lat~vc*ly stiff marine to the bulkheads as a bulkhead
i.. stiffer for its weight is another lightwri<ght their plywood made material bulkheads of vertical has been
Years ago, the in:roducstep forward by at least in strength panels. two other or decorative
staving
surpassed
tnatt-rials that art stiffer and much lighter. Panels fil~t~rglass skins, and thry are used in large transport grain balsa and the other is a honeycomb which is used in helicopter bladrs. Although c.onsidrration. t ht4r high builder cost. such exotic there are other spccializrd factors made
of both these materials come with aircraft. One type of core is endmaterial where Another called Nomex, is a these is
of a DuPont
matet ials can work out well, esperially to consider. and techniques knowledge.
I~latt~riiIlS rquirc-
For example, S glass is twice as expensive as E glass. As for Kevlar, a of high-speed powerboats who uses this material once told me that, pound for was as much as seven times more expensive combination. Since these exotic materials for strength-contributing about the cost of building comment hulls than are using
pound, a Kevlar.,resin combination the standard mat woven rovingresin not used throughout material, it is hard exotic fibers. then, is that When a hull, to make a general
laminate
for laminate designs differ from boat to boat. About all that can i,i! said, the use of such exotic materials will certainly lead to an increase in cost. that the powerboat manufacturer referred to earlier was able to
one considers
I;IRk.XG L.:1.S.S 4 ND 0 7-tIl~.ii1I1!l.!. ,21.-I 7EKI.J1.s effect a weight saving of only 5 to 7 percent, changing, those the extra however, cost is, in most will cases,
always
45 not be
warranted. The state of the art is constantly developed, and there are always so new materials them to who will try to apply
boatbuilding.
Chapter ___-
the
heavily
wooden
to be lightly should
boats of the old days, built. Thus the innumerable as a primary according should holding Ihcy bc sized maximum to their always power.
importance builder.
contribution be driven
seaworthy drilled
fastenings
thought
by the designer
holes of proper
size to ensure
Iron of a wooden hull boat can save a considerable Old timers hand, have passed there and indeed amount down of money that by using galgalvanizedthat seem beached the
fastenings.
boats
this point.
I examined
about 10 years after it was built. that Although the above would appear clurability simply used of galvanized iron. fastenings, fastenings whereas are not the galvanized galvanized
proved just the opposite. to offer contradictory evidence it doesnt. The available galvanized today of yesterday. In the first place, are most
regarding
fastenings likely
of today of mild
the fastenings
steel. When bared of their protective nearly as much resistance to corrosion and trners that teners Here rods cannot have were always coated today are zinc coated be compared no place Independent
coatings, fastenings of mild steel do not have as do iron ones. Second, the old-time iron nails in molten which zinc. Many galvanized zinc-plated nails, fasfashas results in a relatively thin coating
to coating Nail,
In fact these
is what
to say about
I..-I s 7E.lIh .;.s * Galvanized best hot-tumbler, has turned out each to bc generally refer a poorly understood adjective.
17
The
type is a hot-dip,
purposes, pure zinc. Tumbler, process from which the coating Electra and mechanical for appearance often the nails metal. of such nail been goes used galvanizmore than
may be contaminated ing e,tch generally for performance. Galvanized planking without frames separate throughout going and boat
serving have
screws
to frames.
A frame the
through
lighter When
exposing Renailing
Many boats have had progressed with. are the the job, and the necessity to start the threads they tear fastenings,
of the fastening.
is an expensive
In the case of the smaller-sized zinc when reducing around the hole.
and
builder is advised to be sure of his fastenings by using a better metal for fastenings that are to be constantly in water. Although more expensive initially, the best fastenings are cheap in the end.
Brass If a decision alternative water cannot is made would against against using galvanized fastenings it might seem that a good to salt and in
be brass fastenings.
but the use of brass for fastenings Brass as furnished perhaps as much
exposed
be advised
too strongly.
the zinc ieaves the alloy. that the fastening is practically when a copper disadvantages, of interior parts
What remains is a spongy useless. This is called dezinc in exzinc into brass hard too. The being high driven
are mechanical
such as joinerwork,
but care
Silicon For
Bronze structural called wrung fastening Everdur. off when in a boat being it is hard to beat and a copper is so strong silicon that alloy fasten-
every
It is about
copper
to corrosion
and of major importance, it is highly use of this metal removes the risks involved and is well worth value the difference in cost. boat. of a bronze-fastened
and galvanized
to be remembered
is the higher
48
F.4s TENINGS L nickel copper but alloy It can ranks be used above and silicon made bronze from with in silicon Monel strength bronze IS often propellers saving and too high without corrosion for most fear of
resistance,
the cost of screws action between shaft struts and stiffness fastening (See Threaded will be mentioned
bolts
it is much
For instance,
ing bronze
have bronze
for some
because
Copper Copper has excellent corrosion resistance, but because of its scftness it is suitable
mostly for fastenings in the form of flat-head nails that are used as rivets or for clout nails sometimes, used in hulls with light lapstrake planking.
Stainless Ihere merals vast galvanic assutanct~, the bt-st aluminum stainless arc
Steel many alloys and with for under satisfactory other 1his common proof heading. unless used alloy It IS recommended by someone and boat. freedom Without water. stanchions, resistance in the deck same hardware. to applications that these from such It is and
who has
above
frames.
for it avoids
Of the many
salt atmosphere, of thr high-qualitv yacht builders , S~IVLYS to stcurC%stainless sterl half-oval Il~ads. If you can find one of these material. hardware. parts. fittings such fasrt-tiings. Othc*r than as a fastener
hll ps,
316 seems to be the most corrosion-resistant in a of this alloy may take some doing. One or two have, in the past, special ordered Type 316 wood rub strips to minimize be happy bleeding to reduce of the screw his stock of more for and be builders, stainless sailhoat and on spars. proven. he might
and
drrk
Ijulpits,
systtm
propeller
and rigging
As with many
it yourself
of Metals used term electrolysis of metals of metals is blamed is applied on electrolysis, by the average boatman to the corrosion usually the of the other
by electrolysis,
cavitation,
or galvanic
action;
.F.4.SlEILINC;S 49 causes. Except for discussing is an electrolyte in contact :he anode gradually of the attack series and galvanic that action will between an fastenings, electric the subject to flow is beyond between
of :his work. cause current metals when and or close proximity to each other. to the cathode, that is. the anndic destroyed will vary also upon by what is properly to the areas according the relative When this occurs, fitting or fastening galvanic positions corroof the
Sea water
termed relative
in the galvanic
series
in sea water
of some
metals
Anodic Zinc
or Least Noble steel or galvanized alloy alloy alloy alloy 5456 5086 5052 356, 6061 wrought iron
Mild steel Wrought iron Cast iron 1% H Stainless 18-H Stainltsss Lead Iin MangantbscNaval
I ncm1~4
steel Iypc 304 (active) sttst-I Iypt* 316. 3!{, molybdenum (active
hronzt~ (60+{, coppt*r, (65% bronze IS?:, zinc) copper, 39:, rinc) 35% Lint)
brass brass
(act ivr )
Yrllow
Aluminum
Red brass (H5S;, copper, Copper Silicon hronrr (904h (704, Cupro-nickttl Cupro-nickel Coml)osition Composition Incclnel Mont.1 IX-R Stainless 18-H Stainless Titanium Cathodic or Most Nobte
10% 30%
nickel) nickel) 2,/0 zinc, SU, zinc, 10% tin) 61~24, silicon. I I/? ?A Icad)
G bronzts M bronze
copper, copper,
(passive) steel Type steel Type 304 (passive) 316, SS, molybdenum (passive)
It might he possible to use only one metal, fastenings in a wooden hull, but where a mixture
notably silicon bronze for all of the is the most practical, the metals used
50
FASTENINGS be ones that bronze, and are reasonably Monet. close together in the galvanic scale. such as copper, fasteners positions. to hasten has been resistance of one As I the finis
should silicon
sort or another. Note that stainless understand formation ished, surface severely and of oxide. after is more reduced,
by chemical and
degreased.
The passivated
passivation,
the corrosion
and it is best to avoid the use of these metals for underwater fastenbut the treatment has been destroyed or altered, ings. If the surface has been treated, it is best tc treat such metals as if the metals corrosion resistance will be uncertain; they were not passivated. l know of a case wh: re a bronze iron tag screws a perfect example metals were in contact in sea water; stern bearing casting was fastened with galvanized maivanic corrosion. The dissimilar of setting up o first the zinc disap;,eared, and then the iron was
attacked until the bearing finally came loose. Many boats withbronze hull fastenings have been built with cast iron ballast keels. but in this case I he comparatively huge mass of anodic material. the iron keel, would show the keel cdn be of hot-dipped signs of attack slowly due to its bulk. The bolts securing galvanized vinyl-lvpc wrought iron or Monrl. paint The outside of the iron should have several coats of a to act as a nonmetailic barricsr to galvanic action. N~~t-;ih~ss to say, only the Icast cxpc*nsive ritrt~i fastcsners should be used in the construction of molds, jigs, plugs for fiberglass parts, bracing, etc., that will never be part of a boat, hoatyarti It may sc-em ridi?ulous enipioyec3 use bronze for stcsrI nails
and
anti-corrosivtb
to even mention something like this, but I have seen Monet fasteners in throw-away work rathrr than and screws.
are ordinary
machine
al-r made
in silicon bronze, a nut as a head by t breading a pirre of rod on both ends. screwing and pruning over the end of the rod to prevent the head nut from turning. the same material are used under the head and nut. Drilled holes should tliamt~ter as the bolt, Screw hoits are used tor fastening bolts of being able the advantage over drift
bolts with square or hexagonal heads and nuts, and they Monet. and galvanized iron. Longer bolts can be homeon one end, Washers of be the same
Welt-equipped professional huiiders have a die. usually for a flat head. and
shape.
many backbone parts and have the wood shrinks. to be tightener, s.4 -**hen .. head their own tong bolts. They sometimes the end of the rod is heated and forged to
Drift
Bolts
be very long and a through-bolt is not practical or necessary, a drift They are made from a piece of rod and driven like a large nail. The the other has a washer or clinch ring under one end is pointed slightly by hammering,
F.4 S TENiNGS
51
Figure
6-1.
lIrij/ hoit.\ (IIV tlrlz~rl (11 (III (III~IP /IIorrlvr- 10 lock /ilc, /)nrt.c~o,q,rc~t/t~~r.
a driving diameters
head shorter
formed than
by riveting
the end
The
hole
is made
about
two
have smooth
be less than
driving
not to henci the bolt above the timber when driving it. When a pair or a series of drift bolts is caiiecl for, it is best to drive them at an angle (Figure 6- 1) which locks the parts together vanizeii Carriage Thesr and it on, Bolts bolts with a round button head and a square neck on the shank just enables thrtn to resist strains. Drift bolts are made of bronze or gai-
are screw
under the head that keeps the bolt from turning in tnany jrarts of the structure such as to fasten dnd frames and iron, deck and beams stainless to (lamps steel. galvanized Bolt
in the wood. Carriage bolts are used frames to floors, stringers to clamps, and are made in si!teon b:onze.
or she!ves.
Threads are used to hold parts together in their and keep them today because The from threads moving: formed shank therefore, by roiling of these bolts possibly they rolled inis be
be tight of cutting
thrtwds. Bolts of this type are common are cheaper than in diameter in the hole. this is sridc~m the outside
Bolts of this type are ail right the case in the hull
only, not be
so roiled-thread
Wood Screws Fiat-head screws are used extensively in wooden boatbuilding and decking and many other parts. They are available from iron, brass, silicon bronze, and are also produced of Monel for fastening planking stock made of galvanized and stainless steel.
52
FOR
I $fc.lo.
W-8 9
. IG3 * 176 hd p. 37 %s
743 I, I
13/4 hlo. I2
2
.2lG7 ,242
.2613
do. 30
%A do. 25
/2
l/z(
do. I4
7/6A
do.
I8
70 I
2 $f do. 10 3 tJo.zo
OrJE
.29d
.320
9/s %L
/-lo. 13 Jo. 4
s/a 3/dIt
1g
MAYBE
REDUCED HAeDv\/ooP
GAUGE
FOR
DECti1t&3
6-2. that screws with sharp, thin threads develop the greatest holding is
However,
withdrawal
resistance
fastenings
theoretically the planks neighbors working primary that bears stead that that
function of fastenings is not to keep ,.&\a.. L.X,.l, l*rnrL;n- h *h-m ~nm past :hei: driven planked through boat.) seas. (Such Indeed, the
in a conventionally
Here the area of the wood puts more for using wood to screws in-
as planking a nail.
fastenings, The
accompanying
and decking,
the gauge greater planking is meant tion built The preciable Anchorfast
of any one of the screws nails and Stronghoid fastenings, for hulls
with an ordinary boat Unlike common wilt be obvious. bronze nails are available must bc made they usually
nail of the same length, the boat nails, however, Monet in heavy gauges suitable for
Some wilt consider sizes may be reduced for sheltered sizes specified.
the screw sizes in Figure wilt be subiect waters. hole When by a gauge
6-2 to be on the heavy side, but the table service, plans. and other boats of tight construcby the fastening power to an ap-
the screws
A general
<PLUG
(SEE TEwl-)
F 1
FLAT HEAD SClBti
AUP
SCIZEW
Figure
6-3.
cent
threads
in hardwoods planking
and
70 percent into
in the
for hardwood,
is sunk in samples
sizes by driving
a few screws
wood to be used.
or white cedar
planking and oak frames and rhib is satisfactory if the plank does not split in way of the unthreaded screw shank. If splitting does occur, you should drill through the plank with a body drill that is slightly under the actual screw diameter. The sizes for these are also shown in Figure 6-2. It is recommended that either laundry soap or beeswax be rubbed a lubricant and plugged of screws putty pliers press The thickness. recommended with mer. the grain over to make in the threads and rt-duces of screws, especially the driving labor. and over are counterbored while the heads the heads Wood cutter puttied lead or supyears white Dough hardware with wood as the planking, the surface. hull. For many Marine a plug when driving into hardwood. This acts as
practice planks
the screw holes in 5/Hplanking are set slightly invisible but modern teak, scraps for the in thick or oak, plugs below
was used for this purpose, sell plugs and make depth of mahogany, own from are dipped that to that
for a drill
of wood. be about one-third of the plank (the latter holes breaking with a hampaint, waterproof finish), and lightly glue. tapped or varnish home
The plugs
51
F:l S7I*:l~VIN(;.s
Figure
6-4
presenting flush
look. with
Give
the plugs
a sharp
the grain: then you will not chip off the plug to start all ovtr again. Holes tot- screws are started the lend hole. lhesr operations lhtw for the screw hint- lht~ opt7ations. lrv the c~outttcrsink by counterboring
can
for the plug with a bit and then boring with separate that patented bits or with bits that comdrill the lead hole followed that drill the lead it is par-
be done and
countersinks
ccmnterbores
followed by the hole for the plug. (See Figure 6-3.) Ihe latter is used most tm-ause unnttwwry to c.ountcrsink for a flat-head screw that is to have a plug over it. Plugs ticularlv either reducing can near sorncrimcs the strakrs become ends. crowded where the holes where planking wid:h strakes are narrow, will permit the plank enough is least.
staggering
if the width
of the frame
to use a plug
Hardware stores stock several types of wood screw pilot bits made for use in $!t 0 electric hand drills and made for screws up to about 2 Number 12. The two shown in Figure 6-4 are suitable for drilling part and countersinking then should for flat-head below Warwick, screws, the surface Rhode drilling finishing of the Island first a lead hole for the threaded with a countersink. For
IIMII~
of the screw,
In most cases
be driven Street,
on the left is best. Fuller, 7 Cypress countersinks, counterbores. plug cutters, and taper-point industry. Ordinarily these items are difficult to find locally. round-head for securing where screws are used in boats, rigging fastenings tangs must to such to wooden hole. a countersunk things but, masts, for exsince fastening
W.L.
02HHH. has been supplying drills to the hoarbuilding lhcre ample, screws panels and use. Stainless they are the logical of which are only used that items
Oval-head gear
show and for securing as steering screws are used repeated con-
to time
other
oval-head
with finishing
easily available
in the standard
ia t~.-lS7F.~I.v~;S 5.5
figurations
of flat,
round, silicon
wood screws.
It is possible
that until
sold for less than ing joinerwork, experience are basically are threaded for bearing
therefore
be considered
but I am reluctant Stainless sheet-metal for the entire loads. fasteners length
with them.
be used in fiberglass
Lag
Screws sometimes in with callecl lag bolts. a wrench. through-bolts until the holding are large wood screws with a square tightening of a lag screw is gradually shank screw. or practical. wood power of the screw head that the
be turned
Periodic
can wear
in the wood
of the unthreaded
as for a regular
bronze.
Hanger
Rolts having the upper for fastening or head propeller end of the shank shaft stuffing threatled for a nut. bear.
principally
ings and for holding tlown engines to beds. Bv bat king off the hanger holt nut, these fat- repair or rt~plactmenr without disturbing the screw in the parts mav ire rtmoved wood. ma& IIanger of brass lrolts are turned anti silicon in witlt a wrench applied either to a nut run down They to the end of the threads or to two nuts bronrc*. lot krd together on the threads. are usually
Wire nails
Nails are made exclusively and in the form as rivets frames of common wire frames nails and with flat heads. stringers planking They are
almost
for fastening
to floors,
to frames
the planking
without it being so small that the parts split or the nail bends while Drive the nail all the way in to draw the parts together; then the up with an iron while a copper burr is driven over the point of fit over the The burr is
be backed
the nail. A burr is simply a washer and it is important that it be a driving ,iail or else it will dance all over the place when the rivet is being formed. driven up against the wood with a set. which is nothing but a length
hole in the end slightly larger than the diameter of the nail. With nippers, cut off the point of the nail so that a length equal to one to one and a half times the diameter of the nail is left for riveting. the riveting with many Again with the head of the nail backed up with the iron, hammer. do light blows with the peen end of a machinists Heavy
I, 56
E;4S7XNINC5
1 r\lO@-FERFZous
bi ,4 IL ~IZTE~
. roq . 134
200
Figure
6-5.
the wood.
A bent blows
rivet form
tends
to straighten and
under draw
stress,
in a weak,
loose fastening.
Light
the head
the wood
Copper rivets are excellent for fastening planking when sunk. Wood Nails are also thinner See Figure Screws.
for light work but are rather soft. Screws should be used the size of the frame will permit them to be completely than screws for the same wire job, nails. a point discussed under
u Al
MOhlEL
ANCHORFAST NAIL
BLUNT
PItiT
GAL\/
BOA-I- hIAlL
Fi.gure 6-6.
Galvanized As mentioned prcred shank pointed and nail clinch used from
Boat
Nails rhesc nails are cheap are forged, point. fastenings have project and not too much button life can be exchiselthe will are
a peculiar about
head,
In frames
up to about
1 t/i R thick,
the frame,
the chisel
Whether be driven
the holes are countcrbored the surface ting of the planking the coating
for plugs,
the heads
to prevent
of zinc by using
Nails new type of fastening the grooves the shank for a boat is a nail with a unique shape the wood fibers (See Figure 6-6.) annular thread. that
AS
it
on the shank
minute
to resist withdrawal.
takes 65 percent more force to pull this threaded nail than an unclinched boat nail, 31 percent more than a clinched boat nail, and 3 percent more
screw. As these nails are avail ble in non-ferrous material, the objection to nails because of corrosion has been overcome. Some boatbuilders have used these nails for their one planking, quarter. and figures show that some yards have reduced their planking labor by
58
I;,4 SIENINGS
6-i. are quite Tests a few kinds by the people of threzded that make The when nails on the market, form nails, nails including and Independent is owned are made on the head to those making by the some made Nail Inc., AnIn-
Bridgewater.
the threaded
be identified
the silicon
to bending
For fastening planking, nails should be the same diameter as the screws they replace, or else more of them should be used. Pilot holes a!. recommended by the manufacturer should be drilled for all but the smallest sizes. The pilot hole size recommended is 50-70 percent of the nail diameter, depending upon the hardness of the wood, and about 80 percent of the nail length.
FASTENINGS
59
F&we
6-8.
Anchorfast Figure
silicon
of standard
nail and screw gauges as a guide Figure 6-8 nail sizes for various sizes, of course. case. must
60
FA .STEKIh'(;S
6-9.
t-arlier.
Iw
there
are two
othtxr copper
a pIact coppt.1
in boatbui!cting.
struction for fastening ing the laps of clinker the layers nails iron erly, work
ltw
lo thin, flat frames such as seen in canoes, for fastenup to about 1, in thit.kness. and for quilt fastening planking between frames. are glued When rogether and the ttr-ive the nails against the iron a heavy the layers of planking by a helper. and
of double
In the case of the latter. are used only held against the point to know liails ensure [he inside
where
some builders
the next
art c~lf:;ichetl at a fast rate. of rhe nail without than is turned adhesives. a clcnc-hrd through, rhe wood but clout nails fasreners lhis works all right in the laps of softwood nail. earlier is about for riveting to enter copper is turned thpractice be compared point over by holding driving arl iron against the wood the the how the nail until to determine process plank-
lhe point primary ing and rivet nails. iron head much
is more
a snug hole as described the point When the man all takes a hook.
outside
completes
to rhe thickness
ing fastened
61
3/4% (by
I
2.7
hh
ml* thick
/4 -KJ 3v
(by I49
+icK
Figure
C-10. 7rtrfilt~orrfrl
\i/tiilrt
nail
lengths
available
from
Iremonl
Nail
Co..
Massat~husc~~~s 0257 1 antI 1)uck ~lrap Woodworking. colnvillt~. Maim- 04X49. Irtmonr is also a tiistril)utor for ~rirditi0Ilal square sllaf>t* and tlishetl power of a square roves which have the same CUI copper nail is a great deal more
funcrion
traditional use of square nails i\ as rivets. As with copper wire nail rivets. a snug hole should be drilled and ht~ading should he done with light blows of the peen hammer. for when the dished side is toward the wood, ir serves 10 tenIhe di:hetl rove is unique. sion 111~rivt.1. lhc heads planking. ~hrrefore of nails shown iron in Figure must 6- 10 should shaped. hc countt~rsunk into the 111~ hutking be suitably
Miscellaneous
Fasteners tyl)es ot fasrencrs that have some uses in hoat construction when materials. Machine screws are bolts and are non-corrosive for light work. Usual sizes arr from Numbt-r 6 (a fat 5/n) up 6- 11 is a rahle showing when vou will find and in brass. hole sizes for clearance this very handy. chrome-plated guns, Machine brass, and for screws bronze,
Figure
will he times
are made with flat. and stainless sterl. Staples, pieces pensive for many applied other of wood when
can he used IO hold thin woven materials, staple that and I have later. ultimate they can he of inex-
or other The
such jobs.
If the staples
are to be removed
steel, otherwise
62
F/l S-IENINGS
BODY
$ -I-A9
DIAM.
r&i
DRILL-5
sCfEb&T
-M?EAD~ pf3z INCH 72
@R USa ~TYWDARP
4 @oLTS
ZEtTAf DlzlLL
MACHINE
SIZE tb. 6
.ry3
b40. 30
do- 20
32
t&u2 14 5hkl if
1 .a6
32
20 10
I &I. i3 I
Jo. F
do2(/64
2
0 u yzff
250
.3125
-375
%3 I I211
Figure G-1 1.
.500
16 13
long Monel
wire staple
with coated
legs that
defy withdrawal.
Driven
been
ttlc staple head will sink below used to fasten plywood decking otht1-r similar plywood parts.
the surface of fir plywood. These that is glued to beams and around
Stapling is the fastest method of securing parts and is quite satisfactory when used in conjunction with an adhesive. For many years rivc.ting remained a method of fastening used only by professional
the edges
and
many
5)QUARE
IdeAD
MACHINE
BOLT
(HEY!
HEAd
MACHIClE
l3OL-r
(FLAT
HANr3EE
-LT
CLINCH
Bolts
in
corn-6ouI -
F.4SIE:NINGS 63
Figure 6-13. lht~ fmrut~ o/ II /into nusiliu,y Iiorltd iI1 Ilrts tvxt. metalworking shops.
thfh
of pop
rivets.
minor
riveting rivets
Most hardware stores carry these amatfaur. .Ihis kind of fastening is a one-man job, because hole and srcur-cd from the samt d~~ck tha: The latter side without fiberglass is usually employed a molded and rub rail. allov. parts, in production
and
an aluminum
extrusion and the rivets are of a 4milar water, and generally for fastening thin
Their use should be limited to above the say an assemblv having a total thickness
such as aluminum of no greater than h . Those who make their own metal enclosures, alloy C;ISYSfor clcctrical switc.hhoards, will find that pop rivets make the job go a lot easier and faster. Metal galvanic Fittings corrosion. fasten
bron7r
untlc7water shaft
as shaft silicon
rudderposts.
seacocks,
and
propeller
fasten
stainless steel trim and hardware with stainless steel, bronztb fittings with fittings with hot -dipped galvanized fastenings, Marinium bronze. galvanized with stainless steel or Monel. and aluminum alloy fittings with stainless steel when steel. it is not easy to find. you should use Type 316 stainless you can
Adhesives Adhesives. used either alonr or in conjunction it must with mechanic-al that fasteners. are some of
However,
be remembered
an adhesive
is not a cure-all
64 and ture
l.~:~.SlE:NIN(;.S that for it to provide the adhesive period. II there were only from
water-rclsistant
strength
it must
be used temperature
as directed, and
to mixclamping
(when and
is two-part),
pressure, Until
l-)ro~/
adhesives of hollow
than booms
&laterwere to
masts or paint.
it, being
by varnish
Water-resistant
glue still has a place and that consists types, fitted. breakthrough as Elmers by Borden as Elmers has
joinerwork
is prote-*-:- - finish coating. CLCUwit11 The modern counterpart is marketed Plastic Resin Glue (formerly Cascomite). This urea resin glue, that is mixed time, with water, and provides is less expensive a joint that than the waterwhen the good wnrking from is colorless canoe with
of a powder
properly The
adhesives
development consumers
of a resorcinol
is also marketed
by Borden It is packaged
Waterproof
parts, a dark purple resin and a light-colored powder, and is best mixed by weight as instructed. It will produce a joint strnnger than the surrounding wood, but the joints should cinol he well fitted glue and pressure must be applied until curing has taken should place. Resorcarethe time hulls. glue of is a two-part sets up quickly Rcsorcinol glue in hot climates is often and , so the instructions too much planking Glue be studied
on by mixing resin,
builders
as well.
adhesive, very easy to mix and apply. One part is a powder that is mixed with water to the consistency of an easy spreading paste. The powder has a shelf life of two years; the pastes shelf life is one to three which other adhesive has an unlimited surface is wetted down is strong, shelf with months. life. the The second The part two is a water-like on one surface, surfaces are then liquid and catalyst, then the This Ihe paste catalvst. heat. is spread
mated.
it is gap-filling.
temperatures
Some of tl~r epoxy resins are among the best adhesives for use in building wooden boats and parts. .Ihcy can even be used for joining wood and polyester fiberglass parts to polyester achieve than various ditives epoxies Tech simpler fiberglass. bond, Epoxy and is extremely pressure and the makers strong, if used thick to ensure hulls with multiple epoxy 105 epoxy it does enough
not
require SC)that
pressure
to
a good
it is gap-filling
a strong
layers.
be used
to thicken
to proper
of West
have several
On the other hand, there for use as is. Arcon E- 152 and Arcon planked hulls or any other down glue. of resin-to-hardener epoxy
spreadable T-88
high-strength
~:I.ST~:.LI.L;(;S
65
to Epoxy is written
Users about epoxy that resins and the material be remiss Avoid is so valuable not to warn contact to boatbuilders, that epoxy resins, skin
it would
with unprotected
the fumes released by epoxies as they cure. These words are to reinforce directions that are often taken lightly. I have never had a problem, but who were unhappy, so beware!
seen others
for Adhesives and marine Glue laminatts hardware stores carry The Elmers of contact Elmers Plastic cement glues Street, Resin Glue and Elmers Formicalarger than Maryland Spruce and in the Woburn, the epoxies Park. Ohio City,
Most general Waterproof type plastic quarts 21230. Acrolire Specialty (astern
brands Co.,
in quantities
are handled
1401 Russell
product
Fullerton,
California
is available
Montvalr firms
anti
addrf~ssrs
produ(.ing
Arcon I+ I52 and Arcon E-15-1. Allied East W~~ymouth. M;tssachust*tts 02 189. (:he~rn-Tech 44U22. Wrsr Michigan 33561, Ilnipoxv I05 -18706.
fyxy
Inc.,
Chagrin Strecr.
706
Martin Street,
Kristal
900 Fourth
Palmetto,
Florida
Chapter
build how
from
l)lans, but
and
plan
in com-
be (11awn
repeated
IO build
is so important
pit-tic)11 of a boat that instructions drscription of thr work involved. sional boatbuilders. but otIlcrs find once the paratively
in boatbuilding would br incomplete without a Thp job is distasteful to some, even among profes. it IO be fascinating work. Either way, it is true that be assured that the combuilding is time well spent and templates from the same conform
plans are on hand one becomes impatient, but few hours used to properly prepare for the actual
and will never be rqretted. The full-size drawings from which molds are made are especially valuable when more than one boat is to be built plans, or for the construction close dimensional trace thr history on the trrold loft always consisted down, or templates of a one-design tolerances. of shipbuilding to discover why tht- full-size board. hence class boat where to reasonably OIW must laitl loft, ctown
Molds
drawing drawings,
almost laying
a workshop
of some sort, thus it was a moldon all and shoes. edge that thr mold loft was preferably
sides and o\~tAratl smooth. sufficiently The floor was painted as a baseline. Lines work of enlarging of the floor there served Hull The
to provide maximum light. The wooden sacred so somt~ vards prohibited the wraring flat white or light gray, fixed batten sometimes having
was a permanently
the plans
from
I.lhES
67
mold lines
lofting, that
these
drawings lines
molds should
are made
of the
hull and various beginner reading under edge above these from. define Figure construction of deck
to make
interesting,
the different to aid the from hulls or ends and a hull points to because around
magazines characterize
lines drawn
the profile
of the bottom
as seen from the side at the same time the sheerline they are not sufficient between these lines, establish for the builder the three lines. simply
a gulls eye view of the outline the shape of the boat between
Altholtgh
are important,
the architect
on planes waterlines,
conveniently
points
for dimensions.
and diagonals.
If a hull could be lifted straight up out of the water without the resulting hole filling in with water, the shape of the edge of the hole would be the same as the shape of the boat at the surface architect convenient want then of the water. the depth On the boat, lines drawn this line is called dnd beiow the load waterline subdivision the load waterline and the into for the to the to the called planes. it is one of the most important divides spaces, by the designer. For further
of something
and draws the edges of additional better, are also called waterlines there and the they are vertical conveniently of inclined diagonal planes spaced called
horizontal planes which, because they are parallel buttocks, outboard drawn horizontal as many are located and and signifirant parallel these are to each
load waterline. centerline centerline. diagonals, points although having vertical outlines tical, established the many shape lhese planes,
Then
evenly to the
side of thr
edges
planes to provide
are drawn
vertical
actually drawn
CI(~OSS the hull have been by vertical fore-and-aft a section planes intersects
or shapes diagonal
transverse
intersecting sections.
are called
wherever points
and by means
of intersection
it is possible
to make molds
of the hull
as the architect
has it designed.
Sections may be compared to slices of bread. Just as is the case with the sections on a shapely boat, the slices through an old-fashioned rye loaf are all different, for the . . shape is ever-changing from end to end. A vessels shapr. :hen, LQIl c-- be transm:tted :nto three-dimensional form by making full-size templates of the sections. When these are set up at each sections respective station the same as called for in the lines drawing, vessels shape in skeletal form has been established. The vessels shape is represented this manner just as a loaf of bread would be if every other slice was removed, buttock, diagonal, keeping the spacing of the remaining slices Figure 7-1 has been included to pictorially the same. show waterline. a in
while and
Y x : 2 2P 4, i cl 1 n i I7
Iy / 3 I ?,J I F 9
)I: /I t ;i
k,
\ \ 1
II/ ; ! I: j~
!! k i : 3 6 i ;i A --- i
I 1 7r 1
; i/l iJ-
I/
\ > \
,A v A, , -Jx.. \ -. \\ X!
I I (J z n i
.+=-y _ 7 ! \ . L :a _ Lo.-7 r
--y ,I /),. -5 i Ll 0 F i
i :: C
LINES AND L.-IYING DOWN sectional the various body plan diagonal, Figure necessary from planes as though be seen a solid block how a point half model of a hull were sawn into pieces areas, wherever plane. in Figure together worked to build
69 on
planes. it may
The shapes
of the planes
are shown
and on the a buttock, 7-1, and with the a boat out for are inangle of curved in sec-
on the hull
by an athwartship for the same in the and (Incidentally, of waterlines, of the stem, their For laying location of a hull mentioned
on this plan
these lines,
for illustration
as well as offsets for the profile board, Because of the nature it is possible of diagonals, plan. to define
dimensions
of dimensions
Sometimes
the shape
such as in Figure l-7. In the case of a really simple hull with straight-line sections (see Figure 7-3), the sheer, deck line, chine, and/or profile provide a sufficient number of points lines, from which and to make the frames or molds. This eliminates further the need on. ior waterbuttocks. diagonals, as will be explained a little
Abbreviations Before reader we go any furtlirr, it should for words with them. C.L. W.L. Butt. or buttk Diag. B.L. Sta. Fr. Dk. over all of load waterline L.O.A. L.W.L. Sect. Displ. fl center of buoyancy C.B. C.G. or L.C.B. bc pointed out that many sets of lines plans for
of gravity
Offsets An offset is simply straight another name for a dimension, Dimensions and they are always drawing taken from a
line of reference
are tabulated
,L.5 i-j- . j- 3-s j & G, f !Y-.. -0 r7 .# *.I .* 2 ! 1*/ 3,; & -\_ / 1 !I \< \! ;i ;\ ---t 66 :I *_: I\ :i \ I.4 iYl k 4 U .! t! -2 ;\ 2: 0i C ~ F dlY 5 -. . . 7.A _ PA 1 , is
- + / ~0 ?i j, ,;,, / a / i 3
1; 4 5
i@ :i /I$ t
/ ?1 /: j> / 4 I :A
a 2
a ? 61 :
l:
2i 81 5 01 -
i:
I, i ,
Q j
ii i
----.a
or PC 9: :u 0 L:tI
~ I
71
FLAT tkTTOM
L.JEc-
loor
PLIH
7-3. Slrai~tll-sectrhncd
lines.
to write them all on a lines plan and not have them become confused. of fractional dimensions, of inches. it has been made general practice 2-5-3 means two feet, of their or For example,
a multitude
(You will find that you will read them automatically pride themselves to one-sixteenth on the accuracy of an inch; this is shown in thus we get 2-5-3+
once you have tried a few.) Some architects lines and offsets and read some dimensions 2-5-31/j.
the offset table by a plus sign or lV$after the eighth numeral. gling with feet, inches, and all those 64 fractions of an inch.
One of these days metric offset tables will make life a lot simpler than strugfurther along, but at this time it would of the wood or
The use of the offset table will be explained surface of the ht.&. Consequently skin, or aluminum
be well to note that the lines for a vessels hull are almost always drawn to the outside when molds are made, the thickness fiberglass or steel p!ating or planking must be deducted in order from the molds edges. sawn frames are drawn loftsman from shaped of all of which must be
The lines for metal ships or large wooden vessels with built-up to the inside of the plating deducting before The the thickness
drawn when sawn or metal frames are employed, installation. hull lines discussed buttocks,
the number
waterlines,
and diagonals
Other hull types have fewer lines. Figure 7-Y shows an ordinary flat-bottomed rowboat having but four fore-and-aft lines, namely, the deck and sheer, and two views of the
72
LJNES A ND LA YING DOWN which is the corner at the intersection profile. of the side and bottom. Also shown are lines. If they
chine,
to a flattie except for the addition boat consist of straight and these would be
thing is to find a place to do the job. to the dist-rnce from the baseline there is one, equipped plus some space boatyards
At a minimum,
to the highest point of the sheer, or top of cabin if for just this purpose that is It is too much to ask that
sanded smooth and coated with flat light gray or white paint. an amateur level space,
have such facilities at his disposal, so the next best alternative would be a such as a floor or platform, where paper or plywood may be used to lay
down the lines. A few years PRO while visiting boatyards I noticed lofting being done on a very heavy, light bplge paper that was also being used for patterns for one-off parts. This material was 200.pound Alexandritr template paper, 12 square feet per pound. In each case it was purchased from a paper goods supply house in a nearby city. The in. formation about the paper is given here, but the amateur builder will probably not be able to cope with the cost of this 72 wide material. Each roll is said to weigh between 500 and 6Otl pounds -- a lifetime supply indeed. The drawing supply people make a buff detail paper of acceptable quality, available up to 48 and 54 in width, in rolls of 10. 20. and 50 yards and priced reasonably. Some of the paper-faced building panels are also all right, and SO is plywood, as mentioned above, in standard-size panels that may be arranged edge to if several pieces are used to edge to make any size desired. Whatever the material, make up the required size, the pieces must be secured against movement.
Lofting
Tools
To draw sharp lines, flat carpenters to make it easier to distinguish pencils between but an or-
The tools for lofting are few and simple. are used, sharpened Colored different
to a chisel point so a thin line may be drawn for a long distance. a steel tape is ideal for long lengths,
dinary folding six-foot rule will do, and the rule can also be used to lay off many short dimensions. A large carpenters square, either as manufactured or homemade out of :/H or % wood, is needed for drawing lines perpendicular to other lines, such as for station lines in relation with a regular to the base and waterlines. You may also erect perpendiculars or improvised beam compass, as will be shown later. The adjustable as will a straightedge six or eight feet the really
long, which you can make yourself from a piece of thin wood. For marking
LINES AND LA YING DOWN long, straight line stretched intervals base and waterlines, tightly between
73
you should use either a masons chalk line, pencilof light, strong fishing under the cord at marking in points directly
ing the line on the floor before the chalk rubs off, or a length two nails, of about three feet, to be connected
Battens
Fair curves have no bumps and are pleasing set of battens, which are nothing more white pine or other such wood. These than the line to be drawn. making a tapered to the eye. To draw them, you must have a square-edged pieces of clear
than straight,
should be at least two feet longer at each end stock isnt long enough for the job, batin the middle, where the curve is least, by Or the line itself may be all the points on the
18 to 2 in length.
pieced if you make sure there is a fair overlap For best results, you should use as stiff a batten
curve, for a stiff batten will tend to fair itself unless unduly forced, whereas a supple batten can be passed through all the points and not lie fair. It is difficult to say just what size battens should be used, as the correct size depends so much on the length of for the lint and the character of the curve. A batten 14 to $1 thick by 1 th to 2 wide used on the flat is suggested relatively easy curves like the sheerline. For certain the battens at the ends somewhat,
with ail the taper cut on one edge. For curves in the
plan view, also known as the half-breadth tried. Like a lot of boatbuilding of batten
plan, something like I$$ x 1 Mor th x 1 t,4 used on the flat, possibly tapered at the ends, or :?t square and untapered might be operations, accumulated experience will aid in the Curves sizes. If you have a table saw, start by making the strips narrower the battens on the as needed.
selection
such as sections. the stem profile. and similar shapes will be drawn with shorter battens, probably j/H and 14 square, and inasmuch as these curves sometimes have harder bends in the middle than at the ends, such as around the turn of the bilge, they may have to be tapered points. A batten is held in place wiih finishing it. Not necessary contrast by any means, nails driven on both sides of it, not through from the standpoint of readily but very desirable in the middle in order to make a fair curve that touches all the
sighting the shape of a batten when sprung to a curve, is a coat of flat black paint. The of the dark batten against the light-colored floor or paper will help detect a line that is not fair.
The Grid
By examining waterlines, the straight the table of offsets, diagonals, Figure 7-2. it will be seen that dimensions and out from the centerline. for the it is
buttocks,
sheer,
and profile curves are laid out on the station Therefore, This group of lines, called
the grid, is shown in Figure 7-4. You will note in Figure 7-5 that the grid is set up in a
MAUI.!
A SCRtES
OF b4VER
11ol-n srR.ocl5
cdcq
;LO,L
T 4 T y
lfJ?tCTLY
-DRAV/ltdG D a, m .-,
AIL --VJlTb-4 5HARP POdT
A STPAIGHT
LINE-
-BEAM I K-f-l
COMFASS
I t a e 1
SHCCR
*Al-&~ .
jZIXj ;I \
6
-THE
i ,, ,,,,,, /,,I[;; ,j I \
1, \
. \ al ( I ._ t . BA5E BA7-t-d (OPTlOtiAL) +
;i L,F
0 .
GRID-
/T
met6.w mctt
FOE
CLAEWy HAL/E
THE
DIAGo~IALS BEt?!d
AtiD 5HOWd
BUlTOC<
hJOl-
Figure 7-5. The lofied hull lines are arranged d$ferently,from plan in order to save space on the mold lqft floor.
those on an architect Ys
76
LINES AND LA YING DOWN form relative to the paper plans: the half-breadth plan is superimposed save themselves from on low The
compressed
over the profile drawing to save space and to minimize crawling around the loft floor by building Thus the grid is started
hands and knees when laying the lines down. (Some professionals swivel casters.) the baseline dicular to it. may be drawn either example by drawing a straight
spacing of the stations is laid off along this line and the stations are drawn in perpenThe perpendiculars beam compass, with a set of trammel points, a regular 2
or an improvised
one, and is done as follows. Mark a point A (Station in Figure 7-4); to each side of point A. Lengthen C draw a straight
then using the compass with A as the arm of the arcs above strike two intersecting
line CA is perpendicular to the base. This method can be used at each station, or it can be used at only one, with the resulting right angle used to build a large square for drawing in the remainder of the stations waterlines perpendicular in profile to the base. lines With the exception of the load view of the spacing on The spacing waterline waterline, of the straight is taken from the architects to draw the profile mark off the waterline
to the baseline.
except at the ends of the boat. Therefore, and again one or two stations
As mentioned above, the offsets for the curves are dimensioned as heights above the baseline or distances out from the centerline as the case may be. Some of the dimensions will be long enough that you will not be able to tell readily whether the end of your rule is exactly on the line or not. To be sure of this and to save time, some builders nail a batten against the under side of the baseline as shown in Figure 7-4. The end of the rule can then be butted against it when making measurements. lnstead of a batten, a nail may be driven at each intersection of a station with the base. You will find either way to be very helpful and, to say the least, easier on the knees.
Sheerline
measure up two feet, eleven inches above the base on Station 0 and make a mark. Move the rule over to Station 1. read 2-7-2 from the table and make a mark 27% above the base. The process is repeated similarly at all of the stations. With all the points marked, it is time to select a batten with which to draw the sheerline, placing it so that it extends beyond the length of the boat at each end. With amidships, Station 3 of the drive nails to hold the batten in place. 4, alternating Now fasten one edge of the batten against the sheer point on a station boat we are using as an example, the batten at Station 2, then at Station
LINES AND LA YING DOWN til the batten is sprung to and fastened ject beyond the boat, After the batten to the unfairness should be sprung at all the points. The battens to extend length,
77
the curve fairly and then nailed. sight along it to see whether there moves very far from one of the giv-
If the batten
points and still does not appear to be fair. pull other nails and make adjustments, ing here and taking there until the resulting points to be out of line occasionally scale compared However, to obtain measured it must be remembered because to the full-size job; the architect
line is pleasing to the eye. You may expect has drawn the lines to a small to creep into the work. as little as possible are bound
thus errors
Profile
and Rabbet
After the deck line has been drawn in and faired, you can continue working on the profile plan, drawing and fairing the profile (bottom of keel), the stem, and the rabbet. The rabbet line is normally found in traditional wooden construction, although it may or may not exist in other types of wooden hull construction, or in fiberglass or metal hulls. For these latter hulls, a similar line may be referred to by some other name. In any rasc, the lines plan will make all this clear. The profile and rabbet must be faired in so that they will meet the relatively curves of the stem and stem rabbet. profile forward beyond way 1.0 ensure that the two sets of curves will meet fairly is to extend the point of tangency 7-5. note that this has been done in Figure the rabbet
quick
INith these bow curves not yet drawn in, the best and with the stem and its rabbet. You will
The stem profile and the stem rabbet are drawn with a thin batten, as mentioned previously. When points for the stem curves have been marked in from the dimensions on the lines plans, a nail is driven at each spot, the batten is bent against the nails, and other nails are driven on the opposite side of the batten If your particular plans give a half-siding next before going on to the body plan. to hold it in place. this should be drawn in for the rabbet,
Such a board is easy to move around to suit making molds, and it avoids confusion of lines on the floor. Referring to the body plan for the lines in Figure 7.2, you can see that the board or paper used for the sections must be somewhat wider than the boat and at least as high as the distance from the baseline to the sheer at Station 0, the bow. Begin by drawing the baseline; then draw the centerline perpendicular to the base. The waterlines are drawn in parallel to the base, the buttocks parallel to the centerline and the diagonals exactly as dimensioned on the lines plan. Needless to say, trouble
78
LINES AND LA YING DOWN and the buttocks of the body plan are not spaced exactly the and profile plans. from /,bto /Bthick for use in and the sheer and rabbet heights carefully identifying each one 7-5. wood anywhere
same as they were laid out on the half-breadth Cut some narrow strips of straight transferring and mark or battens
from the already faired lines on the floor. Butt the end of a strip against the baseline and heights on the stick, These measuring up position with a symbol and the station number. sticks are called pick-up sticks at Station 4 in Figure
and one is shown in the picking on the centerline. stick against to each station.
With the end of the pick-up stick at the baseline of the sheer and rabbet and with the pick-up width corresponding points; point and draw in the width of the rabbet.
of your body plan, mark the heights lines at each rabbet mark the deck lines at each sheer height of sheer and deck draw a of the rabbet
At each intersection
small cross and label it with the station the sheer height/deck
Each section now has two definite and the intersection Nail a batten
width intersection,
height and width. Now to fill in some of the points in between. centerline the centerline centerline batten,
against one side of the with its end against from the offset put a little circle 1; then mark I with the 2A to the right of the
on the body plan and with the rule laid on a waterline mark points for all the waterline lay the rule on waterline
half-breadths
around it with a 1 next to it to show it is a point on the section at Station 1.9- 1 for Statinn With the waterlines Follow with Buttock again Move the batten and diagonal done, go on to the buttocks. II. Then
2, and so on. Do the same with the offsets for the other waterlines. Place the rule on Buttock I from the offset table. with the end of the rule lines. buttock,
end of the rule at the base and mark all the heights for Buttock lay the rule along the diagonal at the centerline and lay off all the diagonal
the layout and transfer of measurements should be done with utmost care and accuracy. In the end, the time spent to this end will speed the job to completion faster than if the work is done in a slipshod manner.
Rdy
Plan
Battens
marks on each
section.
Then
a batten
is bent 7-6.
using a batten
the rabbet
at the centerline,
Holding the sheer and rabbet points as definitely fixed by the previous fairing of these lines, examine the batten carefully and shift it, if necessary, to get a smooth, true curve. Before doing any shifting, remember that points established by lines crossing other lines at right angles, precisely architect, tersections. or nearly so, are more accurate than those established by crossings at acute angles. When two lines intersect working from his small-scale (See Figure 7-7.) drawing, at an acute angle it is difficult consequently to tell
at which spot on a line the crossing occurs; With this fact in mind,
to misread offsets taken from such init is readily seen that for the flat
79
3A
Figure 7-6. Tfz~ body P/UHis best drawn on a portable lCrct>called a .\criuc board.
sur-
sections,
give the most unreliable in the architects diagonal, may be ignored, scaling
hand, they are the best for the topside sections. may appear
Points may also be out due to mistakes In such a situation these points
As a result, all the points on one line, such as a held if they give a fair section or line.
Faking
Diagonals
first, because they are laid out to cross the majority of the sections at
a good angle. Lay a pick-up batten along a diagonal in the body plan, mark and identify all the points where it crosses the sections; then move the batten to the halfbreadth plan and mark each diagonal half-breadth on its proper station. The
Figure 7-7.
80
2 ?I 3, b.4 *,uec -3, lBE.& / p1 ,~ 7 +J! PJL 2* +. I._;i \= z \ pq&f +-if+ -- I ,xkh~~ _ / 4 % b--% x 5: + Ka i 1.. ~_ t
-WI3 PLAtJ-
t S,.=g5-/---f _---/! ii
kc* ..; 11 f \ Pa UCc.x1PCD FrzDV 1 1 bL;i> oinr, ~~ - --..__?Li+--~-~ @PpDoJcc5rp~I , 73 c _ CF ..rcI~~ ____ ?.bD 3 ;. ; / -p&cd ~~ yl - A vrl ?,I ~. ..* _ ,*
--$-Q+ / 0 --<;2w:,,//
1 :;;zY
y$&,:- i
3,.aciO~... CL*a
&.G
ofa
diagonai is then faired, again proceeding as described for the sheerline. If the batten will not go through all the points and at the same time produce a fair line, the usual adjustments must be made. Bearing in mind not to make more changes than are necessary, the sections on the body plan are then corrected accordingly.
Long When
Line
Endings the long fore-and-aft of waterline endings lines, it is necessary is fairly simple. to terminate them correctly. of
fairing
Considering
of the stem has been faired and drawn permanently. with one of the waterlines is a definite
the corresponding point in the half-breadth plan is found simply by projecting the intersection in the profile down to the line ~spresenting the half siding of the stem face in the half-breadth this particular other waterlines Buttock tersection plan as shown in A in Figure 7-5. The aft endings are done exactly at B in the stern end of the same figure. It is obvious that in ends within the boat at the stern, because the 6. is drawn in plan is projected to the sheer. The inA short length of a buttock at Station design only the L.W.L. cross the section the same way, as indicated
to cross the deck line, and then the point of crossing with the sheer is the ending of the buttock wherever a waterline of the L.W.L. point on the L.W.L. in Figure 7-5. When drawing the waterlines those on stations are established 7-5 illustrates Buttock how the crossing II in plan gives another
in the profile view as shown at C fairing points in addition to II in profile projected to and a buttock cross. D in Figure in plan.
and buttocks,
and Buttock
The determination of a diagonal ending at the stem is somewhat more difficult to understand; therefore the steps taken are shown in Figure 7-8, which should be selfexplanatory.
81
The preceding explanation of lofting a round-bottomed boat is modified for other types such as v- and arc-bottomed hulls; generally speaking, the latter types are easier to loft. However, in common, all boats except double-enders have one additional lofting problem and that is the development of the transom or stern board.
Projected Transom
After the sections have been faired satisfactorily, plumb verticai, in which case the section More often, in the body plan. although it is time to consider the development the transom is the and station is actually to the builder
bevels.
of the true shape of the transom or stern board of the boat. Sometimes, drawn at the transom is raked, shape of the transom. shape does not appear need not be reproduced view of the transom, the transom
full size on the mold loft floor. The same is true of the plan it may be useful for obtaining transom
The only way that a true view, and thus a pattern, of a raked transom can be gotten is if its shape is projected square off its centerline in the profi!e view.
Flat Transom
Development of the simplest
Development
of the shape of thr transom type, and its transom lines plan. is sometimes puzzling to the builder, but
there is nothing
really mysterious about the work. The 12 rowboat shapts development For
c35c
is shown in Figure 7-9. The drawn from dimensions the centerline for the .,
has bren drawn at the stern end of the lines in Figure 7-9, but this
on a separate
The transom is just thr same as any section, except that it is located at an angle with the baseline instead of perperldicular to it. Points on the transom are taken from the waterlines and buttocks the same as ordinary sections: it is merely a matter of picking up the waterline half-breadths and buttock heights at the right places and transferring at the end of your lines, as shown in in the diagram. However, if you there is one important point to thcqm to the development If you have space Figurr drawing. drawing is exactly as indicated plan elsewhere.
must locate the grid for the transom remember will not fit as it should. apart above the L. W.L.. tween the waterlines Therefore,
centerline
the development,
or you may end up with a stern board that are spaced 5 be5.
the
On the profile drawing of the lines the waterlines but due to the profile angle of the transom, the transom
grid
drawn across
is obviously
when laying out the grid, the spacing must be carefully of the transom. for the transom and tt,en the intersections with the transoms of waterlines togetht.
measured along
In Figure 7-9 the centerline of the transom, in profile are projected and rabbet intersecti(Jns for this rowboat,
to the rake
and the sheer with the transom of the buttock as in the design
82
o/ a Jlat transom. to the transom where the butLay off d, the proa, b,
and draw them in the grid parallel on the transom point, R. and buttocks development in profile. from the buttocks
tocks thus drawn cross the lines projected width of the rabbet, Now project the intersections
of the waterlines
of the half-breadth
and c are picked up with a batten and laid off as points A, B. and C on the corresponding lines in the grid. With all the points spotted, draw in the transom with a batten the same as you did the regular sections. If you must draw the transom on a separate sheet, very carefully pick up the spacing of the intersections along the profile of the transom on a batten, as shown in Figure . 7-9, and complete Curved Transom location of points as described above.
Development on either a sailboat finished appearance necessary or powerboat is considered. is very handsome, From the aesthetic and although viewpoint, a
is more involved than for the flat type, the extra work is worthwhile is not generally on small craft up to 20 or 25 feet overall, but for good looks is an absolute type is the most difficult to sltirn. This
above this range the curved transom must on a hut1 with an overhanging develop, transom due to the combination in profile.
of the radius to which it is built and the angle of the such a transom are bent to the arc of a circle as seen in profile. A pat-
--
- --
--
-----
--.-.
-.-
I cut and rolled out flat. A transom the waterlines, proportioned as shown in Figure
83
:~~~-~:Y
7-10 is developed
tocks, because they cross the edges of the transom and thus are the most accurate. are an infinite tocks and must realize that those on the architects possible to have on a hull. There clo-Fly as needed 7-10 has been curately, between purposely to hc!c, you make proper extra buttocks is attempted, station
more nearly at right angles than do lines plan are not the only ones it is number, and they may be spaced as The stern in Figure the transom acmust be added faired full size, to develrp of the tramt.m for parts
templates buttocks
but ordinarily,
for development
those shown on the lines plan. the hull lines have been completely at the extreme beyord the transom. To be sure of the shape of his hull, the arstern and then cuts it off at the above.
There are undoubtedly many methods of transom development in use and sworn to by their advocates. However, the system illustrated here will at least help the reader understand smalier the principle. the stern in Figure to another. the profile and half-breadth plans of 7-1C have been drawn separated and the transom radius made Dashed lines show the projection of the flat transom of one view the development in Figure 7-9. the use To avoid confusion,
of the buttocks in Figure 7-10 is obvious, with the exception for the expansion.
Extend the after side of the transom in profile up clear of other drawings, 7-lOA, and draw a centerline perpendicular to it. Tangent to the intersection, will be bent when it is built. same as in the half-breadth the expanded measured measurements transom, Draw the buttocks plan. Project buttocks parallel to the centerline,
an arc of radius as shown on the plans. This is the curve to which the transom planking spaced the the intersections the buttocks the buttocks of the burtocks with the arc out from the centerline plan. when the cylindrical as
in the profile view. Now prepare the grid for These tran-
Figure 7-lOB,
spacing between
the buttocks
edge of the transom as was done in the flat transom, Figure 7-9. For clarity only one buttock, Buttock II, has been used as an example in Figure 7-10. In order to find the point where the transom line is drawn in the auxiliary in this view, select convenient above the centerline the half-breadth the auxiliary breadth ferred the points of intersectior? projection, projection terminates at the sheerline. centerline; the deck shown in Figure 7-10A. To draw the deck line square them and then square
and also down to cross the sheer on the profile: with the sheer parallel and a batten
plan. The widths of the deck at these points are lifted, transf+=rr?d tn is run rhrough them. The corner of the transom the arc of the transom. around The halfthe arc and duly transwhere the deck line intersects from the centerline
RADl U5 OF TRA?450M -
CE~NTWZ AINC
--
yy~~,gNSO~
,L E!%PANoeo
of a curved transom.
LINES
85
Figure
devehpment
Powerboat Sailboat
Transoms transoms often have considerable rake, as shown in Figures 7-10 and 7-11,
but there is usually little angle to those on modem power cruisers. A small amount of rake may be neglected in the development of the transom, and the radius can be drawn directly on the half-breadth plan, as will be explained. The powerboat stem shown in Figure 7-12 is not typical of many present day boats in that the topside sections do not tumble home. This avoids having waterlines that pile up on top of one another and makes the transom development easier to understand. Draw the profile profile Holding jected angle of the transom or buttock radius constant and project every intersection of it with the plan. view of a waterline the specified up to the centeriine throughout, in the half-breadth
swing an arc from each of tht proto the line in profile. ProyWc: lines in that the
with the arcs back down to the corresponding Of course it is important the arc, Figure 7-12B. around
and then across to the grid, Figure on the grid are spaced as measured
2 CL F -4-~~ 3 CL 2 I ---
I ! i
i j 3 3 !/ A-4 /I ! I +I ,
I IL !B ys (I /j +t-
z-y
--
-z-_
+ SE -&&
#I
nH 3 0 ii
LINES
AND
1 1 YING
DOWN
87
The development is the shape of the outside edge of the transom planking, but allowance must be made for the bevel on the edges, which causes the transom to be
larger
on the inside than on the outside face. thickness must be deducted before
the transom
frame,
:he
planking
for beveling
can be made.
Computer-Aided
Lines Fairing
in this chapter the offsets, is to correct errors in the a small-scale
The purpose of much of the work described architects drawing, manship. hull lines drawing. due to mistakes made in reading
Errors creep in due to the necessity of making and because to depart from the time-tested
but the professional should certainly investigate services that fair Such computers fair the lines from the table of offsets. lines by computer. in corrected rule.) offsets reading to one-sixteenth extension of an inch or one hundredth with an ordinary lines fairing of a surveyors sixis the full size
foot. (It is easy to lay out offsets in feet and decimals foot folding A logica!
of computer-aided
drawing of the body plan, and this is discussed in the next chapter. I have used firms supplying computer-guided lofting for hulls up to 78 feet in length. 25 Hallett Hill Road, Weston, Such lofting is available from Justin E. Ketwin, Massachusetts Street, Bristol, 02193; Rhode Bristolcomp, Island 02809; 13027. c/o Halsey C. Herreshoff, Inc., Inc., 18 Burnside Drive, RD and Hullforms, 3667 Woodland
#3, Baldwinsville,
New York
Chapter
of the full size drawings of the lines for the hull. the builder is at last boat or for molds for a wooden hull. they are hull or a male plug for a fiberglass or cold-molded
ready to start cutting wood, be it for frames for a sawn-frame Molds are made from the body plan, and because made from lower grade lumber
than that used for the boat parts. Any lumber except
hardwood is suitable, the thickness of the molds varying with the size of the boat. A rough guide is XV for boats to 16 , % for 16 to 24 , and 1 rror 1 igNfor Z&footers. As you will see further cept that ribbands along, the molds are set up on the backbone are bent around There or keel of the boat, exboat and strips of wood called ribbands the molds similar to planking,
are bent to shape against the ribbands. experience advantageous is gained that setting
are two schools of thought as to whether but it will be observed as when the for the boat is simplified
the frames should be bent inside or outside of the ribbands, up the frame frames are bent inside the ribbands. to make a permanent for further and the mold is removed the outside of planking the frames the thickness When a number
mold, in which case the frames are bent outside use when the hull has been planked. For setups where for v-bottomed
in Figure 7.2, like those for all small boats, are drawn to the molds for the sections are made only after Similarly, frames
and the full-size lines are lofted accordingly. has been deducted.
boats are made only after the thickness of planking has been deducted. It should be obvious after you have studied construction that to make a mold for a round-bottomed bined thickness boat with the frames bent on the outside of the ribbands, of planking, framing, and ribbands must be deducted the comfrom the sec-
tions that are drawn to the outside of the planking. For methods
88
wooden construction,
89
RAOlYS= OF
THIC~(NE l=LANC(\NG
-BOD)/ PLANFigure 8-l. Plajrking thickucss can 6~ deducted by sin~ply drawing a parullel wction insido the IWP sections by thr amou,tt o/ planking thickncss. Howtqler, this is not a zltq accurate method.
deductions
depend
of each construction
plug that will be used to form a female mold for a fiberglass the plug planking jigin the chapter thickness. need be deducted. one-off call it what you will) for a so-called on Fiberglass skin thickness fiberglass
hull, only the thickness of sandwich thickness hull as described must be equal to plus the ribband must be equal or
Countless boats have been built from molds where planking thickness was deducted by simply drawing lines inside the sections by the amount of the planking thickness. However, this method is only acceptable when the planking is thin. Let me try to simplify planking this. If a hole was drilled was measured through the planking, and the thickness correctly of the in the hole, the planking wouid measure only q the
90
Figure 8-2.
AEC
CL
,P:-h
.-_
4-n L
same token, such a h,ole would only represent deductions proximately would be fairly accurate parallel
hole were at right angles (n,. -TmaI) to the surface o/the it&i. (See Figure 8-2.) By the a truly accurate deduction when the hole itselj lies in the same athwartships plane as the stations. Thus, in a shapely hull, the
amidships, where the
pian view waterlines run ap-
break away
sharply
toward the centerline as one progresses become increasingly inaccurate. IJnless the planking deduct planking correct, absolutely diagonals parallel thickness
would
is thin, it is best to take a little more time and make an effort to snore accurately. To make the thickness deduction even to the extent almost of adding
in addition
to those shown on the lines plan, but this chore is not necessary in at each station layoff the planking thickness (See in the p!an view of the lines, then pick up this thickness along take a batten and draw through
the station line and transfer it to the body plan, laying it off normal to the section. Figure 8-3.) When this has been done at each waterline,
all the points to get tire inside of planking. Once you have done this for a few points the work will go quite rapidly. When all the sections have been redrawn to the inside of planking, the molds for a round-bottomed boat can be made. Figure 8-4 shows typical mold construction and Figure 8-l shows how the shape of the section is transferred to the mold stock by pressing the lumber down against closely spaced tacks with their heads laid on the line to be reproduced. Turn the wood over, use a batten to connect the marks made by the tack heads, then work the board to the line. Do this for each station. It is not practical to use boards wide enough to get out an entire half mold all in one piece. Therefore, the mold is made in asmany parts asnecessary, and laidout in anyconvenient manner to suit the lumber stock. Just remember that the mold must not be too flimsy. Normally the mold should be extended a half foot or so above the sheerline, but if it is planned to build the boat upside down-a logical method for small craft-the molds should be extended to a straight baseline above the sheer that represents planked the building floor. Depending on the size of the boat, the inverted baseline is made parailel to the waterline and at a height so the greater part of the hull may be fastening them
from a normal standing position. Lay the mold parts on the sections of the body plan while carefully
9I
yP,Aw.r
-7 CLhESS
=-r--i@
CM-SIDE c;F P-IUICIHG LAY OFF l-0 %aA-4 NORM&L LC*I
A *
A-
-I *
<TI. h
t-
1 L&WcTFF IT,.I 0 PLaNa. TntCuiNtSs 2 Pmc* UP o,CT.*.s n-n. 0 -rPa.+.(~5L l-0 9cJoy
fLAti (WC@)
planking
01 AOOhlnL LAccclRFZ
ORACRS MOLOS
Od
IMALI<
l?$T.RND bI3o+lD
MOLD 5ucCR
It
li
SWttR, L.W.L.
4 c.L. Od MoLD 7
\I I \\
rl
9lMPLlFl~D
IF
ALL
\
SECURELY FATTEd MOLD T+*RTcTs-- PRRFRRAR~s vJIl-bl5ceRNs -
&Ails HEIGHT
ARR&<~Mt A0Ovk
bhXCI+ KCfL
Figure 8-4. Tvt)icnl mold ronstrurtion. lain their shape when set up.
92
MOLDS, TEMPLATES. AND THf BACKBONE with screws and butt blocks. rsefore the half mold is lifted from the plan, while setting up and building. Turn
together
fcr reference
the first half of the mold over so thar. the butt blocks are down and make a second half it. When the mold is aswmbled, the butt blocks will then all be on the same side. Connect the two halves at the bottom with a block, which should be notched if reand fasten a crosepiece, called a spall, at or near the at the same or base, the molds will be easier to align when set up on the
quired by the keel construction, height above the waterline keel or floor.
deck line. Spalls on all molds should be level, and if they all are located
the widths of the stem are the molded dimensions, for the stem is the sided dimension.
a stem for a
small craft like a dinghy should be made from a natural hackmatack or oak crook as they were some years ago. A template of the stem would be taken to the dealer in this material builders, to select a crook with a shape similar nobody seems to bother to the stem, but except for the island with this any more.
Most often the stem is too large to get out of a natural crook, so an assembly of wood will be made up as illustrated in Figure 8-5 or the stem assembly will be laminated. For the amateur, out. When an assembly of parts is used, templates transferred with tacks as explained of the parts are made, the lines being for the molds in Figure 8.1. Templates are usually Besides !/i r, or y8 thick or of plywood or hardboard. for who does not usually count labor. a lamination is often the easiest way
made of easily worked softwood representing the shapes of the parts, the templates must also provide guidelines rabbeting the stem assembly to receive the planking. The profile struction and fairness. of the rabbet line may or may not be dimensioned of the rabbet a constant
plan, and even though it is shown, it should be checked full size for accuracy The width or half-breadth retains line is generally width throughout
boat or swells in width toward amidships It was mentioned before that countless not deducting more precise the thickness) each waterline rabbet 8-5. the thickness of planking method that consumes the stem rabbet.
and then narrows again toward the stern. boats have been built from molds made by method, and so it is with how to lay out the rabbet by a
but little more time. of the stem (the half siding or one-half of planking has been drawn to get the back is 4A in the profile, from the waterlines with a batten. Figure in the
has been drawn as well as the half siding of the face of the stem, and on lines to which the material must be cut. The nomenclature
and bearding
to plot these lines on the profile are projected plan to the waterlines
The lines
Figure 8-5.
for the rabbet and the outline of stem parts are all transferred at the same time. The templates
to the template
material
are laid out on the stem material and arranged so that there will be a minimum of cross grain in the finished part. Cut and plane the parts to shape (if too heavy for your equipment have a mill do this for you) and lay them out on the full-size lines to check the alignment line, all the waterlines, put the stem together pound between Whether precaution of the joints in the assembled position. Mark the sheerof the bolts; then bore the bolt holes and with thick white lead, t hiokol, or sc rne other good bedding com(the surfaces that touch each other) of the joints. and plugged, you should take an extra This is a ptece of and the centerlines
or not the bolt heads are countersunk to make the bolt holes watertight long enough
by using a grommet.
cotton wicking caulking bedding generously before centerline centerline. Referring of the rabbet material the bolt is driven
to go around the bolt a couple of times. Apply After assembly of the stem, mark the
to the wicking and wind it around the bolt just under the head just all the way home.
of the boat on the stem and the width of the stem face on each side of the to the half-breadth at the waterlines, the templated plan in the figure, make a tc.mplate of stiff cardboard Use the temp!ates the rabbet The to cut a short length by working away the may be cut wrth and then complete
at each waterline.
rabbet
94
M0I.D.S.
TEMPI.,-I
7'E.S.
:I.VIj
TIIE
RrlCKR0.V~
r;.:
i=C>-T
Figure 8-6.
rc~nficienc~ fessionals the time perience it more if the full-six drawing IS accrlrc!ta and complete. However, even some pro-
leave the rabbet ,just a little shallow and complete it when fitting ribbands at the boat is set up. In many cases this is because they have learned from exthat their rabhet is not as accurate 7 it was stated as it might that be. Here is how you can make sections are drawn at intcrbe acctrate. of Chapter r!re length vertical of the boat to define the shape of the hull, but it should
realized that sections can be drawn through the hull at any angle, not only at the verthe horizontal planes of the waterlines, or the tical planes of the stations and buttocks, often does this while drawing the construction plan to diagonal planes. The designer get the true, drawn normal are the most accurate sizes of parts such as the stem assured. it certainly to the part out-of-normal is full accuracy at the bow, assembly: only when a section is Since the waterlines and buttocks pays to draw auxiliary sections at
right angles through the strm of the boat in order to more accurately cut the rabbet. The less dubbing that the amateur must face after he sets up the boat, the better off he will be. For the same face, or nearly reason so. bevels should be taken off lines that are normal to the hull sur-
Figure 8-6 has been prepared to show how easy it is to draw sections through the stem. The sections should be spaced at intervals close enough so that there is no question about having enough of the plotted points for the rabbet, bearding fines (see Figure 8-5) to ensure a fair line. To save time tions should than be drawn right on the lines profile, for clarity as in Section A-A. separately as was done in Section back rabbet, and and effort, the sec8-6, rather
B-B of Figure
MOLDS,
95
W.L. n
L@&WE*IDICULA(ZS To
INTW~ECTIO~~
C&SnP @lr -j-HE C.L. OF THE. 5=3-lO~. LAY OFF ON -rwz QERPEwIcuLALJ -WE HALF ~%EAD*!: 3~ me ku~-rERLlrJEr t: WnocrCC cZ$O5<-. EFAMPLE: BUTT. 1 AVOVE-
OF BuTrocK
C.!m. 9,
4 PJAT=LINEC
DUAWJ -IiWJ
Figure
stern sections
in p/arc
on /he prqfi[~
is drawn For
normal
to the
face
of the stem,
long
enough
to cross
instance,
to give a number of points so a batten can be set up to the centerline for Section A-A intersects two perpendiculars and can TO this centerline in the stem off when be laid are drawn assembly. at the in at the joints (For an ilis drawn are picked
intersections perpendiculars
8-7.) Next
the half-breadths
at these points
up as in the plan view and laid off on the perpendiculars 10 establish the points for the section to the outside of planking. After the section line has been drawn, the thickness of planking is set off, and bearding line. Instead method profile of making shown by Figure this sets up the points for the them 8-6. rabbet for the rabbet, from the back rabbet, plan drawn and the in the on the
templates by Figure
half-breadth sections
8-5, make
accurate
as illustrated
96
MOLDS,
YEMPLATES,
AND
THE
BAChRONE
REVEL
4=-n
AT
DE& rT===+
i-lAiF
0READTH
ILAbJ
BE\;Ei
AT CHINE =F h
0EiEL
AT
KEEL
-_ .i-u
BOTTOM
FRAME
Figure 8-8.
FPAME
4 (~~%ING AFT)
Stopwaters
Softwood dowels into called stopwaters are fitted the joints. that they in joints in the backbone of stopwaters wherever to prevent is important crosses water fcr a
from leaking
full effectiveness:
the rabbet
joint in the backbone. Any durable softwood such as white pine or cedar there are so few of them that they can be whittled out of scrap.
V-Bottomed
Temporary bottomed nent Figure part
Frames
molds are not necessary plan Typical 1, but 8-8 and for v- and the construction of v-bottomed that become frames the entire that hull against and arcin of
Instead,
the body
frames
are beveled
(See A of Figure
MOl.DS,
TEMPLATES.
AND
THE
BACKBONE
97
same
This
makes
for more
work,
of boat
or curvature,
B-B in Figure 8-8, where the deck line and chine are it can be seen that there is practically no to the centerline, as the deck and chine curve in toward the centerline, forward must be beveled. sections frames like that shown bevels in Figure 8-8. the bevels can in the half-breadth The bevels above are at deck and chine chine
with straight
at chine
cut in a straight If the frames the same, from points Bevels similarly frames
but those for the side frames in the chine when bevel with half-breadth and the later in and bevels
at points
between the deck and chine are taken. dnd those for the bottom frames at from the buttocks in the profile. off the to and clamps At that time, by planing (and are fitted are taken battens for fairing the frames. this is very important should be thickness
taken
in which
is set up.
adjustments
are made
accuracy,
however
in the larger hulls with a good number of frames) the bevels much like the deduction for planking normal to the surface, discussed. This can be done by the method shown in Figure
~-
--...
-..
&-
.~
Id ,,irrd
Figure
8-9.
98
MOLDS.
TEMP1.A
TES.
.4 ND
T1i
'E
BACKBOh'E
\I j I
-DE
ef11
/ -2% L
RE\JEL BOAED
Figure 8-9(a)
as shown so that
on the body
in degrees be sawn
for reference
proper bevel. The bevels should be taken along mal as possible to all the frames crossed.
diagonals
Bevel Board
Instead yourself bevel read of using a simple and a protractor bevel board mark off angles to measure as shown from a bevel each 8-9(a). time you take Slide one off, make about and the adjustable
in Figure until
30 degrees.
as When a bevel is marked on a piece of stock t o be sawn, it must be designated either under or standing, marking the piece UB or SB. This is most important, and after you have ruined a few pieces, you will understand the principle.
MOLDS,
TEMP1.A
TES.
.4MD
THE
BACKBONE
99
Lofting
Fairing which defining otherwise. are
by Computer
hull lines with dealt the shape Earlier to make the aid of a computer of the hull, was mentioned whether in the previous metal, frames Here chapter, or for
with enlarging
of the set of lines fiberglass, and that hulls molds is where fairing plotter at any but the you
needed
framework project
A computer-guided or unequally) is avoided, of the hull. to you. Therefore, you understand drawings. as many too many spacing
the outside
for the edges of the molds by the computer along just Theres spacing
how the
will be furnished,
with probably
no stopping
is usually
at uniform
Sometimes
of joiner
dividing
accommodations,
as molds or frames. If full-size plied by the computer service, Many of the larger skin or shell plating service material, shell can supply plating. boats
bulkhead drawings are desired, these, too, can be supand once again you should ask for the edge bevels. of welded from steel or aluminum alloy framing, to shape with a from flat For this type of construction which to cut the frames with the deduction the computer of the
so the drawings
Transom
and Transom
Bevels
molds, the stem, and the transom explained You also need are needed before
has been
som edges. Remember that the developed shape of the transom is to the outside of the planking, and depending upon the type of construction, it may or may not represent the actual size of the finished transom. The simplest method is to let the side planking overlap the transom and to then cut it flush with the after side. In this case the plank thickness is subtracted from the edges of the transom. The best practice, however, is to make the transom to the outside of planking and rabbet the edge thaii f-rr the planking. the outside, except Both methods are shown in Figure 8-10. Figure 8-10A shows that the inside of the transom at the top edge where the shape depends upon boat narrows from amidships to the transom. v-bottomed boat, the edges of the transom must
is larger
to allow
100
MOLDS,
TEMPLATES,
AND
THE
BACKBONE
NC BE .E (ILcoeeECT:
RE .ELE3 -i%.ri70K A.
ETABBE?FD fLAh.JSOM
/X-T-
Figure i3-10.
flat. The bevels waterlines profile curate Small doweled planks marine Larger drawing.
are taken
from
- those for the sides from the from the buttocks in the of that this is not the most acdone normal to the surface
way to take the beve!s off, because boat transoms and waterproof can be properly plywood, transoms, are generally glued. The fastened
of wide boards whose edges are splined or should be sufficiently thick so that the hull can also be made of to the edge. Such transoms
made boards
with cheek pieces around the edges to take the plank fastenings. like that shown in Figure 8-lOC, are made the same thickness as the and have a frame or cheek pieces on the inside edges to take a is usually a vertical member on the centerline, the transom to the keel or horn timber. For the planks Wide are not caulked. transoms If single planked, also have a series of vertical
hull planking
or thicker
share of the p!~k fastenings. There where a wood or metal knee connects sake of appearance, the seams are usually the seams backed
of transom
with battens.
B0l-K
PM
5KlFF
~_--
i rtiee~s~~
A
EWTTOM PLAN<:lNG 1
./-
TeA&.OM
5-rTtM -4
PLANK
lCEEL
ARC
BOTTOM
SCM
8 ,
CErJTER0OAKb
N Ti?UNK LOGS
UT
RA00ET
small
boat
keels.
stiffeners outboard engine stringers. Most transoms cold. In transoms wet rags or steamed
These radius
can be soaked
with hot,
to be encountered
by the amateur are illustrated in Figures 8-l 1 only sound timber should go into the longevity,
POWER WOOD
BOAT SHAFT
WITH LOG
dMCI % I lk y*;-+ *g;::; ..qj r BeaLL ~cI%cP L Fe*=- -ctf r- ~. - ~.&z~&LL,, ._-pig=,. -;_ +. - --------&, , ? - 4OPC~~CLL ,)*AFT ,TCV 4 . .-~ -.-_ $ .~~~~.~~~~~_~~=lb~=f -4 -_-_ --.--
l-
wve.4
BOAT
PL
c.c- LAP
many
possible
backbone
structures.for
powerboats
MOLDS,
TEMPLATES.
AND
THE
BACKBONE
103
White wood
oak
is the
usual shown
material in Figure
and
other
by local
practice. is very common. then the bottom twin keelsons fastening made
one on each
of a single rabbeting.
one on the centerline. The side planks to the inner, construction should to make them
Before
keel, cut a slot for the skeg on the centerline of two pieces, inner two. The rabbeted was done templates keel in Figure stem, as shown, then to avoid and the outer
many
in Figure
at each
from
to make
the two-piece between a rabbet, plank be taken the floor and keel.
after
be thick white lead or other such All backbone joints are so treated. sailboats but B-11C. This is all right, If the frames because
to the
be well fastened
be thick to make
rhe keel.
Powerboat The
keel structure
keel is usually the same thickness throughout and is cut to shape from a template made from the full-size profile. A batten bent into place on top forms a back rabbet for the planking. timber tightness continued Although worthy amateur worked plane. through against piece because mercially add stopwaters The where rabbet is cut the same A bronze shaft as for the little log with The bottom boat in Figure gland B-11B. The horn aft is rabbctcd. the shaft fittrd aft and of mention. to make out and lhe purpose do, and the splines the bolts log is bored a jig must made and than packing is installed for water-
of the keel may be cut away or of the rudder. log in Figure this is easier 8-12B is for the a plow that to cut swell shaft section: table pine. l.ight. The
not scen
as much A two-piece
the shaft
hole in each half can be saw or with It is all right The splines shaft
grooves
just to align
an auger
be devised
auger length
of sufficient by welding
Therefore, of rod.
have someone
the needed
in a piece
It is very important
104
MOLDS,
TEMPLJTES,
AND
THE
BACKBONE
with box.
a light
copper
tube
pipe
to exclude
water
from
the hole.
under
Fin-Keel
Fin-keel 8-12C. enough
Sailboats
sailboats up to about even larger steaming 30 feet may have bent have had the keel to shape. the keel being over. of the bolting from between in order frames. to properly fasten is extend the casting through the deadwood, The deadwood bent keels like that shown in Figure a
boat of this type is upside keel added Attention the fin. The carefully must ballast be given although as called
to the sequence
they terminate
and although
it requires
a lot of effort should be put into the deadwood to make it smooth and fair, not only for the sake of appearance but also to offer a minimum of resistance as the boat moves through and can paint the water. The aft edge of the sternpost forward edge of the rudder. swinging is sheathed it hard is gouged While over out to take the rudder side, sheet it is impossible of marine brought growth, around on stock to the rounded be painted the concave the forward to each copper accumulation edge of the rudder
by alternately
the after
Large Sailboat
The backbone
Keels
in Figure sailboats of the 8-12D same is typical thickness of most from keel sailboats end to end, as shown or combination but varying keel
and centerboard is a thick throughout tical position the heights is drawn plank
upwards
The keel in such boats in width The verthen secup than in the section.
the length.
It is rabbeted
of the keel in the hull structure of the keel at the stations the half-widths profile
in on the full-size
profile;
tions in the body plan to obtain on the piece of lumber the full-size the baseline the outline draw along Draw and laid off from the spacing half-breadths keel stock. shape aligns The with outline
A centerline
to be used for the keel, the station (the station because the keel is at an angle After
of the top of the keel are picked of the keel with a centerline and similarly
the sections
MOLDS,
TEMPLATES,
105
of power
backbone
of the backbone
by construction
on the architects
Backbone
After
Bolting
members are shaped, the investment but prior to fastening them These together, it is
recommended are inexpensive quid should Through-bolts as shown sequence (Figures being that
they be given two coats of a wood preservative. for their rot preventive
qualities.
also be poured down the and drift bolts, described plan will go together be driven must are not made have thick
bolt holes before the fastenings are driven. at length in Chapter 6, are made and fitted and the fastenings because must be studied for that properly. fitted It will be seen as you go along they pass through until in and are finally at marine composition bolts in the structure or to collect the bolts in balls later. possibly driven suppliers
floor timbers All parts so to a start in the joints to wind home. or at and earlier
no crevices
it is advisable
of cotton
would
be troublesome mentioned
annoying. after
the familiar
The stopwaters
Scarphs It is not always bilge stringers, possible clamps, to obtain and pieces of wood long enough sufficient for the keel, deadwood, lengths may be found for
shelves.
Fortunately,
keels more often than for theother parts, even though an extensive search is required. The backbone requires enough work of the builder without his having to splice the keel, long glued, Bolts noted strain. Figure that particularly members the joint are the type shown out in wood be made thickness three to prevent The hooked in Figure by means are often up with types 8-12D. When it cannot joints for good white lead be avoided, called measure. or heavy and the If not paint. be used pieced of through-bolted waterproof-glued the usual permits. commonly slipping plain scarph in use, that it should when from by the other employed under thick scarphs.
Nowaday:<
when nibs
is extensively
for stringers
B, is sometimes
in backbone
106
/iI
(ILDS,
TEM
PLrl
TES.
4 ND
I-II/i
HACKLWNl:
FEATHER
EDGE
KnEd PEiZMT5
A. PLA\h)
SCARPH
B.
H03ti
SCARPH
c.
KEY
SCARPH
Figure
8-13.
~~OUIUIOII scarphs
us ktds,
members. Just simply a plain durable made foot. The drawings the timber, experienced keel, scarphs most scarphed wood
as effective, and easier to make, is the key scarph scarph mortised to take a tightly fitted rectangular like white driven oak or black from both locust. In large timbers of about planned length sides at the same with a taper are carefully
shown in C. This is key, preferably of the key is sometimes one-half and inch shown to the on the of If the infor the of
of two wedges
joints
is six times
the depth
up to one-fourth
of the depth.
not be able
the designer
the available
material.
01.13.s.
TE.21
PI..*1
TES,
A ND 1.1IE R.~lI:KHo:vE
107
Tenons The mortise-and-tenon perpendicular S-12D joint is sometimes When the case. called The joints upon to lock adjoining the vertical members sternposts when havand the
between
the wood is not too thin, and therefore must parts. the joint be made
the tenon
is made
the pieces,
it is not visible
as snug as possible
Chapter
SETTING UP
With
the
backbone
and
molds
made,
the
builder
is ready
to set
up
the
boat
preparatory to framing the hull. Just as much care and accuracy work of setting up as went into the mold loft work and construction Continued later. hull, much The but merit. attrntion method in general, to detail of setting most at this stage of the game up depends small craft upon are best built the size, type. upside
should go into the of the backbone. in time saved of the that has
are constructrd
be impractical
like a flat.bottomcd
it is so easy to fasten
inverted. By the same reasoning, flat-sectioned boats like v- and arc-bottomed boats hulls are also set up and built upside down. The same is true of small lapstrake that are planked over molds. In this case, the fitting of the lapped plank scams is very hulls, on which the much simplified with the hull upside down. Smail. strip-planked planking is started at the keel and worked toward the sheer, are best built right side up, because it is much easier to nail downhand. and if it has been decided to bend the frames of a round-bottomed boat on the inside of the ribbands as mentioned under Molds in Chapter 8, the boat should be built right side up in order to readily bend the frames. Any other method will be too heavy or bulky upright. would be impractical. In other instances the finished hull for the amateur to turn over and should therefore be built
SETTING
LIP
109
Building
Considering during cover rafters. hand builders somewhat provides
Under Cover
that weather spare means construction from and difficult A building can be a drawback time also permits of overhead is ideal whether site can experience, weather can work bracing be made although bring if it should your to be done of molds to serve the task be cold hull and evenings and windy be built under or rainy under and lights
your
precious
for boatbuilding,
should
well,
of bracing
work to a halt
Building
When
Upside Down
upside down, The a grid must following be established and the framework positioned
building
is a description of how the 12.foot skiff shown A centerline is first drawn in on the be set up in such a manner. off are of for
floor, the station spacing laid off along the centerline. and the station lines squared from the centerline. As previously described, the molds for upside down building extended the boat convenient beyond working the sheer above height. to ~II a~ bitrary the highest The molds inverted baseline parailel to the baseline calculated and located point forward of the sheer by an amount of amidships
are set up on the aft side side of the station are applied. If the will be forced Figure centerline them out of 9-2. on the securely
of the station lines, and those aft of amidships on the forward lines. The reason for this system will be obvious when the ribbands molds their floor, and-aft against 8 that molds: and are set on the wrong proper position line to align Fasten be helpful sides of the station the centerline lines, the ribbands as shown the upper due to the shape of the hull,
of a mold
and also rse the plumb fore-and-aft it would it is now that movement.
line or a level to align to the floor cross spalls where care You will remember
of a mold in a forebrace out in Chapter level on all level, the the floor
the molds
if the mold
at the same
line of the spalls can be used to determine the ends of the molds be emphasized It must the utmost
the backbone
and molds properly. ribbands are fitted, will not be the centerline
An extra hour or two spent on this job will be appreciated when frames are bent, and planking is shaped and fastened. The boat on both sides if the setting up is not done accurately. lines, The waterlines and station lines are all straight and as such,
same
and baseline,
enable the builder to erect the backbone and molds with the use of vertical and horizontal lines just as the designer laid out his lines plan and construction drawings. Shores structure and braces of sufficient The number braces must may be fitted to prevent lumber movement of the in any direction. be of low-quality of any kind.
To continue setting up, drop the keel, with stem, transom, and knee attached, into position over the molds and screw the assembly to blocks on each mold. Secure the
-7 I
.III
110
SETTING
UP
hull upside
down,
head of the stem to the building som after making sure it is raked
across
everything has been done accurately, the station lines marked cide with the molds. If not, the frame is not properly alignzd One test of fairness bet, around the sheer. The ribbands If not, is to bend The test and adjust a long batten until batten, should until with its forward test fair when touches the molds the molds. should tried
on the n.eel should coinand must be corrected. end laid in the stem rabanywhere aligned from keel to forcing.
the batten
not be installed
to your com-
plete satisfaction.
Building
When probably substantial
Outdoors
boats outdoors, longer than there are many down These arrangements building should that are workable, to the ground but on
building
satisfactory
and made
to the parallr1 timbers. Crosspieces are fastened between the timbers to take the stem head and the transom braces. For building right side up outdoors, timbers are placed on the ground athwartships at stations and staked solidly against movement. Keel sup-
::F!?Ei-
M~LW~ej LyM
Figure 9-2.
LINE5-
SETTING
UP
111
<.;,
:h54JC~Oh
F em
&EL 5 ;, ,
2 c,-Trce \yb /
Figure 9-3.
ports mold are built laterally. up with blocks to the proper height, and shores are used to brace the
(SW Figure
9-3.)
Building
Right Side Up
manner as described that are for building erected upside right down, a centerline narrow The and station keels, like bc posts must
for boats
are to be built
for motorboats,
set on posts
securely nailed IO the floor and braced against movement, as shown in Figures 9-3 and 9-4. The heights of the posts arc- carefully measured from the full-size profile and
of ktd
posls
112
SETTING
UP
Figure g-5. The backbone q/a Rhodcs.designed ketch. Note the husky blocks under the deadwood, the shores to prevent side movement of the backbone, and the transonl bracing to overhead.
Quite hull
frequently, being
keels are held down on such posts by floor near each end of the keel. planking is lift the hull Sailboats added raised off the posts when as this action tends to both but only to shore
eye bolts
fastening
from
forced into any place with shores upward and tilt it to one side. Posts are also used in sailboat are often built on their flat keels,
the ballast
keel casting
after the hull is planked up. Or the complete backbone may be finished before setting up, as in the auxiliary in Figure 9-5, which shows husky keel blocks being used to preSuch keel blocks must be large enough to take subvent shifting of the structure. stantial fastenings to the floor and to take the considerable weight of a boat of this
type.
Ribbands
After the backbone under and Molds all molds to hold in Chapter have been set up accurately in position. it was pointed and properly Ribbands out that they braced, are long
are applied
the parts
rigidly
were briefly
8, where
3, / ,~
,?,
iP
SE?IING
UP
113
Figure 9-6. The tvcur,from the stern qu.arter qf a double-ended auxiliary after.frantes have been bent inside the ribbarldb. Note the excellent bracing qf molds and sternpost. The a~~~emnre of the ribbauds i.r pleasing as well as practical. aud the third and fourth ri0tmnd.v nbozw the keel are correctly spliced. (Rosenfeld)
strips of wood bent the frames made not frames cluttered to shape clear perfectly
around between
to provide
a form
against
which
The function
of molds pressure
should because
9-6. which
is a rare treat
up with
As considerable
to clamp
to the ribbands,
be of moderately
and strong
pine. Boats vary to such an extent that there They must be stiff to retain the hull shape but not so heavy that they are hard to bend
is no general rule for when the frames are and hold in place or
that they force the molds of the hull, the ribbands generally bent
out of alignment. As a safeguard against distorting the shape are applied alternately port and starboard. Ribbands are like 1% n x 1% , and spaced about 10 rr apart, or
Figure 9-7. Above: ?irv mm ut right arc fitting riblmndJ prior tojiwmirl.g (1 raciq O?IIO/I of Ihc .sloop, Note n;i>ld brarcjs to thcJ mftcsrs ofthc buildi?zg nlld the strongbd (Roscw/dd). Below. Figure 9-8. Thh nlold cross s/~uIls on t bra cent c~rliw q f the hr. molds aw stackrd h nlold i.s /wing sat up cind rclwfilllv chrckcd ,fk itlig nl(rlt. 0th thr backgrou~ld.
,,Jw,~<
/,
II
II
SETTING
lj
Figure 9-9. A v-bottomed hull completeiy set up with snwn~fram~ and ready for double-dia~gonul planking. (Courtesy of Hz&ins Yacht Corp.) -
116
SETTING
UP about a foot apart. out the stock in ribband framed; A sample should hull definitely be tried around the
getting
for all the ribbands. various types can be seen in Figures heavy cruising sloop. auxiliary that A comparison sloop will otherfor a moderately
sizes between
The ribbands
be in single
if possible,
be spliced as shown in Figures 9-3 and 9-6. This type of splice tends to flat spots in the ribbands, but as a further precaution against hard should be located where bends in the ribbands toward securing are easiest. Put them on by to each to the ribbands the ribbands and close spacing first and, washers will contribute toward The their heads. a fair boat.
Husky fastening
working under
the ends,
top ribbands should go on first. fitted parallel to the sheer and a few inches above it. The rest of them should be run in fair lines similar to strakes of planking and as illustrated in Figure 9-6. The ribbands are spaced frames closer where the frames flat. will be bent to the sharpest curves than where the will be fairly
as the planking
is fitted.
Careful mold loft work and setting up will make running ribbands an easy job and will eliminate the task of trimming and shimming molds to get the ribbands co touch all molds bands, Running dition the shape and still remain of the ribbands is the cause fair. If considerable to see if it touches of excited anticipation trouble is encountered while bent fairing the ribit will pay to check the ribbands usually the sections by bending framing a batten is started, on the part into position like a frame
on the inside
all of them
V-Bottomed It should
Hulls be understood without mention that hulls other Than the round-bottomed
type must be set up, aligned, and made rigid with the same care. There is no point in doing an accurate job of laying down and mold making unless the setting up and the following work follow the same standard.
Chapter
10
FRAMING
There
are
two
basic
systems
for
framing
hull,
transverse
and
Transverse framing is the most common and being have become known as ribs. Transverse frames are either pieces from usually bent from one piece, as in Figures sawn from although bent on top of each other, boards have and made the bent such frames frames, natural
oriented athwartships. for round-bottomed l-5, crooks where laminated of wood, Small material
l-4 and
up of two layers
joints.
frames
as islands to both
are sawn from crooks or douof crooks. and bent (See Figure l-3 for frames hulls are shown in Figures
arc-bottomed
and l-4. Some designers their v-bottomed hulls. For the longitudinal the quite hull, but are longitudinals spaced
of sawn
system apart
transverse framing
frames
are used to shape Fore-and-aft can get boats of welded for the size of frames. Before be should This system
system.
complicated
construction. In this book discussion craft certain likely to be built a craft before starting undertaking
is limited kinds
the builder
of what
is involved.
Frames and construction to Figures l-3 and of frames l-4 and for a v-bottomed the explanation boat should be understood 8. The frames if are 117
you refer
in Chapter
118
FRAMING
SAWN FPAME
-(A&XT 50%
REtiT
Figure 10-l. Sawn and double-sawer round-bottomed are not easy lo construct. . fir the amateur
made bear from the full-size The sections and must be beveled
frames
will
properly.
process
of picking
up bevels
is explained
chapters.
Bent Frames
The peace dispel small bending of mind this fear. boat having of frames for a round-bottomed the construction it is recommended in order to gain boat seems of such that experience to disturb a hull, start the amateurs should with a fairly the mental
but a trial
the novice
and overcome
block that is the principal obstacle to frame bending. We all know that any piece of dry wood may be picked from the lumber pile and sprung to a curve of large radius, but for bending the tight curves found in frames, the wood must be both wet and hot. The material most commonly used for bent frames in the United States is white oak, because abroad. that heats quired The achieved of its durability Although and strength, agencies wood, heat while elm is used that extensively properly, in Canada and responsible is suitable needs should a plank only use unseasoned and stock have proven because oak with a moisture free from surface content checks, re-
it is recommended of moisture
it is usually
by dry wood. be as straight-grained with the grain and then as possible sawing this is sometimes parallel to by splitting out the frames
the split edges. The stock should be about a foot or so longer than the finished length of the frame. It is best to bend the framing stock on the flat of the grain (Figures 6-3 and when boats when Then turned lo-2), plank for not only will it bend fastenings of theory, to bend are driven a frame dimension the frame, crossways size such easier this way but it is then strength great. the woods tendency Speciftcations However, to split for some from the through minimized.
call for a flat frame its athwartships it is just as strong on its other edge
as 1 R x 1% rr bent
on the flat.
standpoint be impossible
is a transverse is relatively
member and thus does its job best If this were carried too far it would is to make the frame square. it may be quickly first attempted.
/ I
, 4)
FRAMING
119
WRONG
RIGHT
Figure
grain.
10-2. Frames
should
be bent
Steaming
Arrangements
You may have seen the steam box at a local boatyard in action. However, the source of steam does not have to be elaborate when only one boat is to be built. It may be generated rigged of water the water necessary, possible in an old hot water must be ample boiler from a house, a large kettle, piped to work. or any similar Watch device for if so a wood fire may be built goes fast. box is wooden. large enough the garboard made and as steam tight as possible frames and planks by caulking some room will need with cotton to spare. to bend and that for a half dozen It is under it and the steam of time you plan to the box. The supply this point,
The steam
steaming
them in place, so make the box large enough for this job. There must be a door at one end, opposite to the end with the steam supply pipe, and the cracks are packed with rags to prevent steam from leaking out. Needless to say, the box should be located close to the boat, because bending calls for fast work before the frames become too cool. Handle the frames with cot ton work gloves. A rough rule for steaming is one hour A few trials will have to be made to get the hang of it. per inch of frame thickness. Light length end. unduly steaming improvised frames are sometimes made supple in boiling water by placing under there is little the steam. them danger them may Typical be in a of out, of pipe set at an angle This scheme drying works the frames. with the ground, should with a fire built in the pipe, the pipes lower
for pulling
arrangements
in Figure
by the builder.
Bending
Frames frames should
the Frames
may either for your be bent to shape in the boat heavy agains: the ribbands method, or bent shapely, plan, on forms the this system first mark
to the boat cold. The former boat are relatively Guided by the frame
and unless
be followed.
the frame positions on all the ribbands and at the keel, marking both edges with a thin batten the same width as a frame and making sure the marks are made at right angles
120
FRAMING
KEEP WATER
. .j ,:
,.,:... ,: .,.. ..
-.
arrangements.
to the centerline.
Start
framing
amidships
where
allows your experience sharp bends are likely The Then frame bend actual start bending and as rapidly
to accumulate as the work to be encountered. procedure by pulling against and goes as follows. inboard cut the heel of the frame the ribbands it then
a frame
as possible
or feet, all the while twisting the head and forced into position
the ribbands.
iO-4A
can be clamped
clamp
ribband,
give it a downward
wallop
head to make sure that it touches all the ribbands, and then temporarily toenail the ribbands so that your clamps will be ready for further duty on the next frame. will soon moved third tends learn that the bending box. must from the steam If possible, the boat be done quickly two men should
once the frame has been rework on the bending while a in one piece from sheer to
is designed
with frames
sheer, there must absolutely be two men bending, one on a side, each working from the keel toward the sheer, in order that the frame can be completely bent before it cools. In many in full-bowed sketch angles against frames ender . in a short boats all the frames and those Because S-12 are often may be bent along the horn troublesome as described timber above. However, of twisting from These bending the frames in hulls like in a bevel at right cant hulls length. aft of the waterline to depart to allow is true keel to sheer.
D of Figure
of this,
frames
Cold-Fitted
Frames
as the type of stern in Figure and hollows are to be avoided. 8-12D is called, should be In the interest of fair lines,
FRAMING
121
/-
CANT FfZAMES
TWhSTlhki
BE\/EL
Figure 10-4.
dre either
bent
of the boat,
as described
stock is overbent on the ribbands. after which it is removed, the ribbands. The curve, and then beveled to lie against to correspond later to that on the outside These frame of the frame cold-fitted, by padding in Figure so that beveled 10-l. the ribwill fit properly.
beveled
in cross-section
illustrated
excess
curvature
is accomplished
bands with short lengths of wood in way of the frame location. Curvature out of a frame after it has cooled and set, but none may be added. If the use of cold-fitted similar quired to Figure lo-5A for the forms, bend frames cannot be avoided, the frames. you must make over which to bend
can be taken
and use it as a guide to build a form. The frames must always be bent to more curve than necessary, and the form can be padded to vary the shape. When ready to bend, the end of the frame is slipped under the pipe shown in the figure and wedged; then Leave the frames on the form at least overthe bending is done with a steady pressure. night so they will cool and set properly and not lose too much shape when removed.
122
FRAMING
OWNG USE OF 5TEEL S-t-HAP IGHT EIJOUGH To bEUD EA. ILY) l=b?ELk.l-f SPLlTTlhlG OF FVA,ME Ul- Cd FORM SUCH AS ABOVE
0.
Figure When 10-5. thrre is too much
CUIW,
thr frames can be straightened with a device like of the shop building. Reverse curves can be made at a time, allowing the first bend to set weil, and then nailing braces across the curve to hold the shape while the reverse is being bent. Due to tensile stress, the outer fibers of a frame will tend to split when the curve is or a corner one curve found long ago that but someone is a very successful way to combat of the simple when bending similar to that need the turn scheme a metal strap bent along the outside of the this breakage. The strap shown in Figure and is very handy. The tendency to split
sharp, frame
10 5~ is typical is also present curves, a strap CaSes the strap such as around
involved
sharp curves against ribbands. If you find some bad illustrated may be devised to do the same job. In most somewhat more than the length After of the hard bend, of a motorboat. some practice you will be
only extend
of the bilge
able to judge which bends may Rive trouble, counter of boats like Figure 8-12D, in which
like those in the S frames forward of the case the frame stock may be split with a
SPLIT
BEf.J-7 FRAME
Figure
FRAMING
123
fine saw cut as shown of fact this is easier ribbands. possible. When use. If splitting
easily.
As a matter the
are bent outside of the ribbands, a strap is not difficult to to, the frame should be fastened in way of the cut as soon as
Floor Timbers
One of the most These important members of the hull material, Without along placed floors, frame is the so-called would floor or floor connection on probbe imposed
timber. between
usually
the frames
the rabbet.
is securely
fastened
to the backbone,
this rule. You will see plans for some powerboats and light centerboard sailboats with floors located at only every other frame, but in the interest of safety, most boats of the cruiser type, whether sail or power, do not omit any of them. Floors are set on edge on top of the backbone structure and drift or through-bolted to frames are either bolts to it, depending upon their location in the boat. Fastenings or copper backbone ly visible bolting rivets. permits, in Figures of frames be noted There are always two bolts practice through to the keel where or four fastenings the width of the on and good calls for three to the frame
in Figures l-3. 1-4, 1-5, 6-1, 8-8, and 8-12D and areclearwell illustrates the b- ! 1, 9-5, 9-8 and 10-8. The latter picture in Figure 9-8 that floors have already been fitted to the pracwith
to tl-,e floors.
It should
backbone, although the boat has not yet been framed. This method is common but would be recommended to the amateur tice for the professional builder, reluctance, point. each bolted With frame, because and this system, the mold loft work involved might try his patience each floor must be preshaped from a full-size must be cut on three edges before hulls, floors must also be preshaped, the shape is obtained hulls. on the plans hulls most and is usually of the floors simultaneously to make, are not so many of them
to the breaking section drawn at the floor can be being an essenwith that so the lofting of is
in position.
tial part of each frame. each frame being built, not as much The of a chore in v-bottomed thickness
there
of floors should
the frames
thickness or shghtly less than the thickness of the frame. Those under the mast steps and engine beds in both type boats are made heavier to take the extra strains found in those areas and to accept the fastenings that run through the adjoining parts at these the keel casting and points. Floors in way of ballast keels arc Jored for bolts through the diameter of the bolts. are of a siding equal to the ordinary flour: nlus , that floors be carefully fitted. Like all joints in a well-built boat., it is impt.,--ltive They ends are made of the boat to have full contact the floors with the frames, and where the frames twist in the A-A in are beveled off to fit tightly as shown in Section
FRAMING KEEL,
AT LE-EL
cBEtEL FLOOR ro FIT TIGHTAGAI~~YT OR72 FRAME -- PLACE FLOORS CM I= 51 DE OF FRAMES FCRD 015 MbSHll: Od AFT SIDE AFT OF Ii4lMHIP
Figure
10-7.
The beveling
and .fastening
of floors
are important.
10-7. Due to the hull curving the twist from in the frames amidships or another on the forward
in toward
forward consequently
will bc toward
forward
the frames
The bottom edge of a floor is beveled fessionals prefer to notch them a half movement of the parts when installation the hull edges of floors before (Figure
to fit the member it rests upon, and many proinch or so over the keel to aid in preventing is stressed. Limber holes are cut on the bottom or bilge water will drain to the 10~7A) so rain
low point of the bilge for removal by pumping. beveled so the planking will bear against them. band in the vicinity, the same purpose. or a short batten
The outboard edges of the floors are This bevel may be obtained from a ribaround the adjacent frames for
may be sprung
Longitudinal
Although hull planks because
Strength
Members
stringers planked, on the and they or not inside clamps may of the may not be fastened part is decked. They in place of the and the before clatnps hull the are con-
fore-and-aft they on
be considered frames.
hull
framing
the boat
Stringers strengthen
siderahly and to be most effective they should fit snugly They a .e made of hard pine or Douglas fir and sometimes jectionable. other about shown than To save weight the smallest the width and make are installation of the boat. in Figure easier, from hulls, tapered in width
and be carefully oak where weight the clamps a maximum and clamps
one-half
Stringers
in the photograph
10-8. If material
is not available
FRAMING
125
T1zi.r photo~gru#
shoua
cnllpd
ribs
are used in all round-bottomed may because be severai :rn each side of the clrne. Stringers
are not
if a boat should tightly together. wood screws, exand lower infor as for as closely in place
is usually
one stringer
_ up of one or more The bilge stringer cept bored board possible and fastening. and plugged corners
strakes, and when multiple, the strakes are wedged is fastened to each frame with staggered flat-head where bolts are used. In some boais and where they will be visible are sometimes builders. The on the drawings, thickness in quarters, chamfered stringers
in heavy construction,
or beaded
appearance depending
should sprung
aft as is practical,
the relative
of the piece,
126
FRAMING
Figure
10-g.
Scr&ions
showing
sht~?r
The Figure
sheer clamp is located on the inside of the frames as shown in Figure 10-9. r;atl 4 !O- !(! has been espe-.-..y ,r a:~n to show :hat in decked boats the upper edge of is set down of the deck beams. This means installing interfering that the from the sheer line a distance equal to the thickness of decking It is important to keep this point in mind or else the height. clamps, with The clamps should the bolts are bolted go ahead have would to the frames to extend for maxiplank the if the amateur the plank and completely through
fastenings. I am a little ahead of myself, There are two ways of gerting around this, although One way is to fasten the upper two since planking will be discussed in the next chapter. planks and in place temporarily and until fastened to adjacent planking for good. frames, is completed. After the molds are taken out of the hull, then heights from the two planks replaced the molds are taken off to enable the fitting and bolting of the clamps
possibly
The other method is to transfer the sheer then cut away enough of the molds to in-
OEck
0EAM
Figure sheer.
IO-IO.
In.
decked
hulls,
is placed
below the
STRlhlGte
TWItOUQH
00l.TdD
FLOOCS ENGIJE STLlhlGtP
--5TQ
t..iGEk5 ObEQ
hOTbtE_7 8 =L~OZZ%
F PA.ES
SINGLE
EtiGlNE
TW,rJ
ENGINE
\ -4%
Jj
j\m!-J_
ii. J
I(
1)
11 ,i..~il~_ii~~,l.-~i~~
_._------<G&E E\GUE
stringers
hull.
128
FRAMING
sailboat
engine
bed installation.
before
planking.
The
ribbands
The molds,
of course,
boat without
The clamps
to the stem and the outside in straight-sided boats, 10-10). Like the bilge or beaded for looks.
planed to fit snugly against the frames. necessary if the clamp has much depth lower inside corners are sometimes
chamfered
Clamps in v-bottomed hulls are installed and fastened when the frames are set up, and with the chines, are used to hold the frames in alignment. Because of the depth of v-bottom frames, the clamps are more often screwed than bolted.
Engine Stringers
In order vibration, to distribute engine the weight of the engine, and also to aid in elimination de+ed motorboats. of hull
stringers
are found
in all properly
Sometimes
of oak, but more often of such woods as fir or yellow pine, the stringers are run as far fore and aft as possible. To accomplish this, they are occasionally pulled toward the centerline board straight desirable the joints bolted frames. drawings forward to permit This applies them to extend stringers further and still be securely boat for twin-engine They fastened and on top of the floors. stringers tions are usually to both craft. in a single-engine stringers to the ininstallaare run It is
in a twin-rngine
the floors and are set on the frames. due to the curving lengths, but if necessary fastenings. frames, shaft side,
hull shape.
The stringers
/R U to % n over the floors and stringers not resting equally centerline spaced of the propeller
the engine
34
FRAMING
129
Engine
Beds
the engine beds are bolted to the engine stringers, Figure 10-11, and
In motorboats
may or may not be notched engine thrust to the stringers, the engine stringers, (See Figure sulted centerline Anywhere hardwood is fitted in an auxiliary 10-12.) of the from
bolts are used to transfer the The present custom of having itself to the installation boited must of to them. be conto the beds. of
and in this case the beds are notched In all boats the vertical propeller shaft
over the floors and drift for the engine the top shaft,
to determine
of the bottom
the lugs and the beds for the insertion with the propeller unless
the engine
have a vertical
adjustment.
Chapter
11
PLANKING
Planking
a hull
is often
difficult
part
of boatbuilding seams,
always one of the simplest out the width not learn seem teaching. The of the planks it much stumbling to give
thought
first-hand sug-
of an amateur
planking
to explain
gested that he study the planking Through the ages a good many
on boats in yards, especially of the type he will build. methods of planking have been devised, but only the and for appearance and swelling, should tight. they should be nicely ap-
most common ones will be discussed here. The individual planks are called strakes, proportioned, tion. Seams pearance, will become shaped open especially unsightly and shut a little
so the lines of the seams are pleasing due to shrinking the strakes to keep on the topsides,
to the eye from every direcand for well-kept not be too wide or the seams
as well as difficult
Carve1 Planking
It will be well to discuss most common, and smooth planking is said at first (Figure about tight carve1 11-l). planking as this method is the
much
of what
boat will apply also to other methods. Carve1 planking is made with the seams to receive seams outside
130
on the inside
cotton
caulking,
which (Figure
makes 11 -lA)
is called is about
out-gauge
x6 per inch
of plank
should
PLANhING
131
Figure 1 l-l.
ordered and 1 I -1B). somewhat thicker than planking
Cam4
planking. dimension than to allow for planing on sharp turns (Figure !/Afor finishing, will determine to build, as choose
the specified
finished more
sandpapering,
the inside
face of planks
an extra
that an amateur
Butts in Planking
Some small boats can be planked with full-length strakes. but inasmuch as the usual of two feet, From the be laid Rather a
available lengths of planking material are from 12 to 20 feet in intervals the strakes will ordinarily consist of two or three pieces hutted end-to-end. standpoint out before than rough of strength, the location taking the butts of butts is important, of the boat, and a plan the work is started, as a guide. a satisfactory way of laying space three without and out the butts, without frame three spaces and into consideration the material it is much
should at hand.
on the frame
easier
be in the same frame not have butts a pair as the frame and might requires should shorter lead, of frames,
strakes between
between as thick
being backed by an oak or the strake of planking. Butt planed on the outside corners Using used chamfered a butt for the normal marine to fit to block
to length
fastenings find
blocks
in white
if you can
but dont
shown
in Figure
132
PLA NRING
pi-Ah-e,
,-
--~----~~ t P-F-T=
+ ,
LACCT
2= PLAti!vi.hiG 3dT-r5
for thm5 diagram)
Figure 1 l-2.
(hi0
sco e ne~esor\l
Planking
Procedure
carve1 planking strake first, a simple 7. The then round-bottomed normal planking and boat like the 12.footer for the amateur broad strakes, one plank used is
sequence to then
alternately
is called.
b-+- -12 n the bottom planking and the sheer. (See Because it is difficult to clamp the shutter, it should be a plank that is without twist, and . hat does not require steaming. is the tot:J the turn number The of strakes garboard to be used, will determined by the and the at the longest toward frame. be the widest, strakes
of the bilge,
and all about the s&me width. The sheer strake can be a little wider than topside planks because of the rub rail often used. As to exactly how wide to make the planks on a given boat, spection of other boats can help. The following is offered as a general tion: 6 to 8 for the garboard, diminishing to 4th * for the topsides the sheer for good Naturally, boat are pearance, Bend strake. These sizes are not hard and fast, but it should appearance,
this is where
be remembered
the topside strakes should not be over 4 th m wide amidships. these widths apply only at amidships, as the frame girths at the snds of the less, and the planks must taper in width toward the ends. Again for apthe taper a thin batten should around be uniform. the midship frame, mark the length from the keel rab-
PLANKING bet to the sheer, sheer for tapered pearance strake the purpose a little and lay out the plank frame and and widths. run and edge the Then lay off the width batten plank. must The be fair. desired plank When
around
at the boats ends and that the top edge if any, must be
on all the frames, of the plank deducted. With must the shape
it
be transferred
for cutting.
be done
without
cdgesetting as spiling.
edgewise
this is known
Spiling
The shape is obtained longer Several batten for its entire than with the aid of a spiting strakc, should be on hand, to the franles; to be made. edge. from batten, because make edgewise. This which is a piece of softwood
about
4 to 6 wide, sure
and Y/1,, or less in they will be mutilated with it lies flat against edge should that whole the be Its upper
below the top edge of the plank will be parallel and batten is to place between lie more on edge. the plank
has probably
the spiling
so determine
and thr edge of the plank. with a curved from pencil edge should marks. the plank compass
be made
To USC the spiling batten, a gap about 4.1 more than plank marks on the frames. point 11-S.) frame lettrrcd on the batten Repeat numbers circle and square at every frame
and set the legs with and the make a with or on.
the greatest space between the edge of the batten With one leg of the compass on the plank mark, down from the line of the top edge of the plank. and at the ends confused of the plank, with points labeling plank for other all points for the particular
(See Figure
identifying
with a numbered
Do not change the opening of the compass while spiling the plank. Mark cuts across the batten for the butt, the stern ending, or the stem rabbet, as the case may be. Now take the batten l l-3B). Before the points then tack off the boat Still making and lay it on the board the compass on a point test with marks, that is to be used for the plank reverse the procedure, mark and in order points and on the (Figure this time, board. until width: not changing any actual against opening,
Mark all the points and the endings of the plank. Remove the spiling batten and run a fairing batten through all the points and draw the edge of the plank with a pencil. Do not worry if the shape of the line is peculiar. If the spiling has been done correctly,
134
PLANKING
-1
to 17
i .L
I-
./i
I
t3oordin Denbf .-I:;, c * \ I
l
wmdhen sP~h?q
wmemzeecw
S,& e&cd
mm .
Figure 1 l-3.
the plank
when
bent
around
the frames.
Now at each
frame
on the
boat, pick off the width of the sheer strake that and marked on the frames. At the corresponding the plank the plank. the deck, widths then and run a batten saw out the plank. through them If the boat is decked,
was previously laid out with a batten frame marks on the board, lay out to draw a line for the lower edge of edge for the crown of on the upper
Plane the upper edge for the crown and the lower edge square and clamp the plank in place. Unless there is something obviously wrong it can be used as a pattern for the same plank scarring plank that from rdge. on the othrr Incidentally. pressure side of thr boat. always After that, it can be fastened for caulking, the plank in place. Bear so in tnind the butt end of a plank will not occur. has to have outgauge just as with a and a clamp
Strake plank is likely to be the most will scrm is determined troublesome plank of all, but once sets this strake it is apart
garboard in place
the remainder
to fit. What
from the rest is that its shape rolr as a starting edge from which wider
by the contour
of the rabbet
point for the rest of the planking. In order to have a nice, to start the tapering of the remaining planks, the garboard end than at amidships. This is net unusual, because and if it were to be tapered dip down. This is the general form.
at its forward
twisted into place at its forward end, than amidships the upper edge might application depends entirely To get out the garboard. a spiting scribed previously, with the exception close to being an actual pattern
on the hull
is taken for the lower edge by the method dethat the spiting batten should be cut so that it is This is especially true at the stem, where
the end of the garboard will be well rounded to fit in the rabbet. The spiling marks must be close together where the curve is pronounced, and they are made plumb vertical from the rabaet. When transferring the spiting to the board for the plank, draw an
PLANKING arc with the compass (Figure 1 l-3C) instead ofjust plank, run a batten so it is tangent to the arcs. Lay out the width bottom board. such should little placed less than and plane receive The take be fairly The that width of the garboard edge of the sheer strake, at the ends curvature or there As stated when strakes. forward any excessive straight run a batten of the garboard is removed. being a point, frame and to draw and,
135
on the frames
bent. upward
the remaining
be as wide (or a from wherever will be a little the batten, square, and to it is
as it is amidships,
test is to sight
and see that the line it makes at amidships. a spiting against As before, the rabbet
is fair and
you look at it. In the case of the 12.foot mark of the edge. Saw out
remove
on the outside
need steaming
to get it in place;
possible that this will be the only plank on the boat that will need such treatment. While the plank is steaming, assemble at hand plenty of clamps, wedges, and material for shores and clamp to the floor. When ready, fit the forward bend with shores end of the plank in the rabbet first it, then as quickly flat against as possible the plank in place while it is still limber. a little short,
the frames
to the floor.
Cut a shore
toe nail it to the floor, and drive a wedge between the top of the shore and the plank. If the bottom edge does not tic properly in the rabhet. clamp a piece of oak to the frames above crushed. lucky, the plank Fasten and drive a wedge wedges directly in place when ateaming against against a block on the plank edge there to move is nothing If you are for in a even cost you it sideways. Never drive the edge of a plank, and or the edge will be
If it doesnt,
to let it cool,
Dont be discouraged,
the garboard is the most difficult material before you produce one
Broad Strakes
The spiting next plank to go on is the one above of the edge edge, and that you have to decide easy to make. plank on your edge and frames, midship Start the garboard, called the first broad, Before running so the remaining by counting and at every and a batten planks beor so At and at when a
is taken
for the upper wit1 be straight tween frame, board of strakes and
it in proportion
the number
the spiting
the distance
the top edge of the garnumber will want of strakes. to be wider Now run the batten appearance
the bottom
It may be that
end in order
it or give it a more
pleasing
136
PLANKING
SCALE
6straKe5 remaining. girth divided b\/&3= 4k 'I @w 3" 15 04 lr/?= 12 eighths
a"
4!q-3=
Divide space between girth nvlrKs on scale batten into IZqual part5
Figure 1 I-4.
viewed satisfies.
from mark
forward.
wider,
but dont
overdo
it. When
the frames,
take a spiting
and plane the plank to shape. system so that when the turn tween there and the sheer
The next two or three planks are lined out with the same of the bilge is reached, the remainder of the planks bemay ail be of uniform width and taper.
strake
Planks
planks and the sheer strake may be lined
out by dividing the unpianked girth at each spiting frame into equal spaces. However, the work can be made easier if you use a planking scale made with a batten about /R Ux I . Mark I,!!ddie of on the batten the boat, divide with the greatest and also the girth girth space still to be planked, space, by the number the which it will be near may be. the shortest distance and, wherever Then
of strakes
is 4 I,$ ; therefore
mark on the scale 4!$ . answer is 3, call the space of an inch there
on the scale 3 . Now find the number on the scale, 12 equal spaces 12 in this case. and label when at that 41$$ into
applied frame.
of the strake
a planking
scale,
widths
of the frames
PLANKING
137
making although
From
now on, it is unnecessary if you find to straighten an interference planks for words, make a mate In other that things
However, a batten
the seams
space
to making
a plank. side,
To keep the hull from on the that remembering for instance, pared
on one side of the the opposite and may due to hollowing, be com-
duplicates
to a pair
Hollowing
Hollowing bottom.
and Rounding
of planks, Figure 1 l- 1 B, is best done with a wooden plane having mark a rounded the finished
After
a plank
is hollowed
of the frames,
thickness nn the edges with a marking before fastening it into position. This
Stealer Planks
The frame start a hull planks typical auxiliary sailboat hull, requires with and planks the greatest planks end at varying necessary photograph, turned in preceding 1 l-5 after girth known to be planked as stealers. of the hull. to straighten Figlut over, clearly forward located at a
well aft of amidships, at the rabbct will show as the turn along upon that mold,
short
These
generally
positions
post, depending
of stealers The
A study of such
over a permanent the stealers and their board lustrated urged ballast to avoid
of being to remarks
chap: ers, the deadwood it is right side up.) Often, stealers are nibbed into there is no garto have one as iland it is strongly on a boat similar
keel will be fitted ends (SW Figure for the length I I-6B. beginning built
plank
to take a fastening,
neighbors. running
In this particular
of the keel rabbet There are numerous a study pointers the job,
be made
for whatever
be picked
Plank Fastenings
The width type of fastening planking of the plank will be as specified with three will permit, on the plans fastenings or according and to your own choice. frame where the wo at each frame
Normal
is secured
such as throughout
in the narrow topside width of the frames, driven into the floor.
strakes. The fastenings are staggered to the extent allowed by the and planks that cross floors have an additional fastening or two The butts are fastened with five in each plank end as shown in
138
PLANKING
the remainingstmkes
as the
in larger
are frequently 6.
bolted.
Drilling
for fasten-
are discussed
After planking, the hull is ready jack plane and using long strokes plane eye. you are liable to plane hollow down with palm and finger
for preliminary smoothing, to smooth off high areas. areas in the planking. high spots that
done by planing with a With a shorter smooth Rubbing the hull up and seen with the
Caulking
Before tight.
Carve1 Planking
the hull further, the plank seams are caulked to make them waterto
smoothing This
is a verv critical
By caulking
too hard
it is possible
fastenings and force a plank away from the frames; if the caulking is too it will he forced out of the seam by the swelling of the planks when wet. amount of caulking adds considerable stiffness to the planking.
The entire job of correct caulking is a skilled art, and if the amateur plans to employ professional help with his boat at any stage of construction, here is a good place to do so. Dont When rolled Thicker marine a clean strands. into let this discourage the plank planking supply floor They unfold break thickness must have the seams you from tackling the job, however. wicking making obtainable strands. separate may be iron. at On the is /8H or under, regular a strand or two of cotton with a thin-edged in the seams, then
with a caulking
so handle
with care.
at a time
in a hall.
of balls from
row seams and plank butts or for adding a piece to a double strand for use where the seam is wide. Keep the cotton clean, or else you will have to pick wood chips and pieces of trash Start a little off the strands sticking as you use them. and into tuck an end of the cotton strand in the seam, then gather leaving the cotthe seam at the end of the plank: at one end of a seam out to drive
PLANKING
139
A 0
Figure 11-6. Two methods
of using stealer planks.
iron
you will use one with a blade iron about The madr drive for the width uniform. the seam. is correct and that
and drive it in the seam with a making iron. /,6 thick at the working edge, but for wider 7, rr thick. Next to the first loop drive a second, the size of the loop just right so that the and this will necessarily to make vary if go for room you have driven is being enough fitting done a few feet of loops, by the caulker of the seam, After This in the seam
trick is to make
to the beginning
the cotton
far enough
is put in later.
dumb iron into the seam to spread it wider. the work with a dumb iron to a minimum. The finished cotton being should driven, not be driven all the it shoulrl
be in the middle
in a tight
rope-shaped strand which should Heavier blows with the caulking mahogany. amount the right 1 l-8. Thus, of mallet depth. good caulking not only by the thickness pressure Dont
make a slight depression mallet will he needed calls for the right the strand force amount
for itself in the plank edges. in hardwood planking like of cotton hulk, determined and the right edges at in Figure
hut also by the size of the loops, a depression tools the butts. Caulking
Smoothing
After caulking, paint Wipe the seams with thickish that paint, gets using a narrow seam brush made while
on the outside
of the planking
doing the seams. When the seams are dry, smooth the hull again with a plane, set for a firer cut this time to get the remainder of the high spots. All the while, rub the palm of your smoothed and then hand diagonally across the planking to find the bumps and hollows. If not perfectly at this time, the unfair portions will show up when paint is applied, the hull must be left as is or else a part of the job must be done over. Sand-
140
PLANKING
Figure 1 l-7. Caulking is looped just muck caulking can harm planking.
enough
to property
Too
paper the hull after planing, gradually using finer grit until it is as smooth as you want it. Garnet paper is better than sandpaper; although more expensive, it cuts faster and lasts longer. seam A tinr~ finish made can be obtained for this purpose. with a diagonal and carefully scraper if you are skilled with this tool. Give the hull the first coat of paint composition fill the seams with hull
the cotton
that
of expense,
if the seam
filled
It is my understanding proper adhesion certainly would seam sides are Douglas fir, and
of the modern compound- 3. This is no problem with a new hull, but it take a lot of work to prepare the seams of an old boat. The cotton and not painted in the yellow old-fashioned have way, but woods such as teak and and perhaps pine, an oil that impairs adhesion conse-
PI..1 NhING
14 1
P // 7 .c d
i :/.
I
CAU,KI~J!G WHEEL
with the
a special primer made by the manufacturers of the polythe makers recommendations carefully in regard to seam compounds are a two-part mix; the silicones are not.
Hull
Painting
while Good the boat is bring about pin; work. paints is cheap paint finished. insurance, job from the hull can br given Take paint start systems, so use only marine to finish, and a priming paints coat will
are in order.
should be followed carefully. The only suggestion I have that may not be d paint company bookiet is to cover the entire inside of the framework and (except where visible in quarters) to paint later, with two coats of a wood the preservative preservative and else. If you do want acts as a primer.
planking nothing
Lapstrake Planking
Sometimes planking. plank start completed. order. The each plank called over clinker planking, because lapstrake planking bent is very different of the planking in place strake when without from carve1 to is in
place,
directly
must
at the garboard
proceed
to the sheer
nature of the planking prevents is planed before final installation, and before painting. are lined out and spiled be taken into account
laying
of the planks.
A 0
LAP
BEVEL
rV&DGE
Figure
11-9. I.npmlrc
/hnkirrg
cic*trcils.
planking can
boats
where
light weight
edam --b-v
for is and
nf nl-nL;nm ic -~PPI~ rtiff f-actpninm I y. . . . . ..b ..I .L., ., . . . . riarn u..- tn . &.. .c--.ae a the .-*-
of the laps,
aned th_innpr
of weight. that
for boats
like yacht
tenders
for high-speed
The section in Figure 11-9 shows how the upper edge of each plank is beveled so the next one will fit tight against it for the width of the lap. The bevel varies from one end of the plank bevel specific little to scratch may wider width to the other be gauged due to the shape of the sections. or mold. As a guide is about Figure Your when l l-9A plans as thin beveling, shows how the call for a it i., helpful of an of as t/t 0 and a with a rule thickness frame. cuts at any frame is increased. should
W on planking gauge
with a marking
or mark
The planks must be flush where they fit in the stem rabbet or against This is done, beginning about two feet from the plank end, by changing beveled builders rabbet rabbet prefer plane (Figure l l-9B) in order joint, This l l-9C. to avoid finishing a feather a tapering lap like Figure with its gauge half-lap off at the very ends quickly and neatly lap. Naturally
the transom. the bevel to a Some of the planks by a Stanley all beveling of
with an equal
can be done
of the plank
PLANKING laps must this part that while be carefully the shape done or leaky seams once will result, but it is surprising gained. and Always sides of the hull, left-hand. spacing riveted is marked between 6-6.) planking screws
143
how rapidly remember the bevels off the After are are
In other words, the planks are opposite. If the lapstrake boat is being planked on the keel and on each frame positions riveted and as each completion are then discussed planks, bet, the of planking. in Chapter the ends white plank plank is made at each
the frame
laps are copper in position. the marks about and fasteners At the stem of cotton marine
to the frames
for lapstrake
be spaced fastening
up to about experts
the plank
ends in the stem rabin the (but tightly builder rabbet. to not glue) unless
wicking sealers
of the modern
for the amateur alternative 11.9D. does not permit If the boat
have devised
or so will be
over frames in the conventional smooth planking. Double The Planking of double and because a sleek planking finish
are clamped
purpose
It insures done
watertightness Double
without planking
periodic is ex-
is thilmer
normal
thicknessof
is the same as single planking. but weight can be saved over a single-plarlked mahogany job by planking the inner layer with a good, lightweight wood, such as white or Port Orford cedar. On the other hand, some of the weight saving is offset by the additional frames. The garboard plank is usually made single so that it can be replaced easily if necessary; the sheer strake and the first broad are also single thickness but are rabbeted for the outer layer as shown in Figure 11-10. The seams of the inner layer are arranged layers. inner fitted, outer pound. necessary. Between frames the layers of planking screws along the edges of the inner strakes are fastened together from the inside with and also along each side of the middle of the to come at the middle Of course, the fastenings strake is fastened, are All seams the width of the outer of the outer strakes. strakes The planking no difference screws, is the primary and when with as for single is lined out and spiled except that there are two consideration. the outer strakes Before planking planking. a double The are each comis the same as for a carve] job, sit akes ate fastened for there is actually with small quantity of metal used to fasten the two layers together between the
sufficiently
it is first coated
outgauge.
as no caulking
144 P1.ANKING
Figure
inner strakcs to fasten the edgrs headed screws with washers under two layers enough would of I I. are so complctrly the screws layer tied from against to takr
of the outer strakes. These fastenings the hrads. The whole job is very strong together. l!n inner Naturally An example planking, the outer making layer the inside. of layer thickness a finished
must
be a 7; outer
to which the planks are fastened along it is possible to plank round-bottomed is for v-bottomed used seam popular hulls. batten construction because
the edges, as shown in Figure 11-11. boats in this manner, the best aplargest many producers years, edges of v-bottomed and the method simple. by the to is fairly
stock cruisers
with amateurs,
The frames may be spaced relatively wider because battens. Figure 11-12 shows a well-built frame ready Marine eliminate batten caulking seam glue is applied the seams, although as usual. it remains and fastened to the battens the seam glue
is stiffened
fastening
between is not
a boat
by this method,
hull
is set up with
to the frames,
------
William
11-R
(Photo
courtesy
of
146
PLANKING been than located with by dividing carve1 planking, and when edges the battens each frame into a number material. adjusted, of equal parts, The the spacing may be are they and in the be battens so that stem,
depending
of the available
planking
widths
say an average they have been are marked removed, screws. a batten, Thus and
of 6 amidships.
where when
of the planking
one or two flat-head so it overlaps is to the middle to) each against from the inside.
is clamped
edges of the batten of the plank from deducted and there ing batten the battens
the shape
is obtained,
the net
the batten
(or added
If the frame
the sheerline
the frames.
Screw fasten
the planking
Strip Blanking
Strip planking enjoyed popularity planking a hull with narrow areas edge-fastened years, and strips of solid lumber-has the interest has become
in certain
for many
greater with the use of fiberglass or other synthetic fabrics and resin to cover the outside of these hulls. The edge-fastening consists of an adhesive plus nails to hold the strips together during the curing perfect cycle of the adhesive. adhesives, as possible.) stable materials. or v-bottomed hulls, and I have I have seen a number of 65-foot 1 was told by the owner lsland area of North wooden canoes were of one 1 be just strip Carolina. The structure skin that (Strip planking from was also pracof plankedgewith modern ticed before ing had fastening fiberglass the era of waterproof a dimensionally such synthetic but the fits between resulting lends the strakes
itself to sheathing
Strip planking can be used to build either round even seen strip-planked trunk cabin sides. In Florida passenger-carrying guess one rould skilled boats with strip-planked was common old-fashioned building. easy for the amateur, the length say that in canoe hulls, that this type of planking planked. in the Harkers
and
canvas-covered precise
workmanship
and should
will be encountered.
Unless
keel to
nbrmally
more to strip planking a hull just like it. It is easy to understand to compensate dimension for this, just of design. in width
than just nailing one that when the girths at least l/z M
something and
m;lst
be done
is an advantage to using square strips, and that is it expansion and contraction gives the chance to select the best grain. Due LO the natural of wood, the strips are best laid with the grain running in the direction shown in Figure
the thickness.
PLANKING
147
is governed
by the shape
of the hull---the
strips
must
bend
on the be
coming close to breaking. At the other end of the scale, to remain fair when sprung to the shapr of the hull. through strip planking the turn are drawn in Figure as can I 1.13. The the amount around of beveling curvature to eliminate they must should or the cutting required, be seen with.
regulates
of the bilge on the unbeveled to be reckoned beveling. can be scarphed. be done be about (See Figure
The smaller
Some
If the strips are not long enough, of sorts for doing radial Scarphs The strips. not mon choice. ing and saw. Thr should length lhc this by hand, length be glued of thi either nails Moncl down
five times
on the workbench. be about for the nails Anchorfast to pennies, be just they are buried should
not on the boat. two and one-quarter times bronze the width nails to water. tightly a matter silicon of economics. If cost does are the first comin place The spac-
choicr
of metal
matter. When
getting
galvanized
because of nails
while the adhesive cures. Nail heads are set slightly below the surface of the wood with a nail set. Some like to drive the nails at an angle to the strip for a locking action. If the hull should mold contains bulkheads to such or other permanent with a nail framing, or screw. glue was used between the edges of however, it needs pressure during every other strip or so be fastened a member
Before epoxy resins became available, resorcinol strip planking. Resorcinol is a very good adhesive;
~~~~;~~
148
PLANKING time and is not noted for its ability to fill gaps. but fastenings, much pressure, run out In strip planking the fits between and to which there is suffithe adjacent Now be a filler can
curing
cient pressure possible from the strakes of planking must be pretty there are epoxies, added, thickening perfect. There be needed the frames are options normally might when it comes for the same be omitted which do not the adhesive
if the fit is less than to build of frames over a hull with that would reduced. temporary Or
up a mold
strip planking.
The edge-fastened
is drastically planked
transverse molds of suitable number to shape the hull. Bulkheads and a few frames, if needed, can be added to the structure later, or bulkheads can be part of the setup and left in the hull. enough The hull is best built with plenty that there right side up, unless clearance of working it is to be quite in a stooped large, position. and is best set up in a building off the floor of overhead so that the keel can be high
is a minimum
Some of the best strip planking workmanship ever turned out was done by Ralph Wiley in his yard on the eastern shore of Maryland. A few of his strip-planked deepkeel sailboats parallel-sided where Wiley perfect advance would much simple eliminates glue take that I saw were planked with mahogany strips about 1% 0 square. The strips extended from the sheer and ran to well below the waterline, then tapered the strakes suitably and worked the edges to bevels for fits. The over. planking where was, of course, the tapering beveled strip started stop planking at the keel and was planned and the parallel-sided than thicker /R is just in too would strips
by the amateur. let us look at a layout designer-builder II- 14. planking for strip planking hulls of that at of Damariscotta, Maine,
Before
tapering tapering.
10 A in Figure
Figure 11-14.
PLANKING the keel and are temporarily equal a tine carefully manently parallel-sided Fred makes from a dozen scrap to a number is drawn marked replaced strips of strip for exact on the strips held in place, widths by springing location, then not permanently a batten removed through and fastened. the points. Then The and
149
frame
or mold,
are per-
or so of the horseshoe
sketched
in Figure
11-13.
are cut
the depth
of slightly
thickness. of Rhodes-designed and sailboats edges. that by a Great Lakes yard using of the strips; II-14B. where hull apstrips another with rounded at the keel and version hollowed planking This strake into the hull. was no tapering in Figure seen was a method
as indicated resulted
of strip down
I have
arrangement
in a herringbone
Plywood
The with tions
Planking
does not automatically without distortion hulls designed construction mean that it can be planked in mind. The sec-
fact that a hull is v-bottomed plywood: of vessels plywood design.!d can for only be used to plank
be bent plywood
thus should
curves that consist of portions of cylinders and cones. It should not go uncurves noted that experienced builders have succeeded where theory dictates the impossible. However. that plywood the methods panels. therefore, planking thickness planking. Also an advantage can be less than it would be is its ability to cover large used just about defy written description. before Suffice deciding it to say then, to plank it with you should review the plans of your boat carefully
areas quickly. Often, standard plywood panels wit! be too short for you to plank in one panel from bow to stern. If so, either special panels must be ordered or else the regular panels and must be butted made fitied, end to end. with good-size wiih screws the plywood apply because These joints, butt blocks. which should be detailed on the plans. glued are generally White it in place. specifications frames, Working there can for screws Some planked etc., being The joints should be waterproof
or rivets. should either be fastened marine with just enough and then, glue screws to hold on the rabbet, of which drilling so they remove on again, of the glue, slightly the panel again drive below putty. lumber for the inner They layer of a doubtein curvature. apply the plywood depending to chines, screws, the ends, of the panel
to hold it.
of the panel
marine instead
even when
there
is considerable
150
PL.4NKING
as will bend
on the hull and in this way save labor over the usual
doubte-
method.
Cold-molding A cold-molded boats) skin. or strips Generally, hull consists bonded of multiple other of strips layers of thin with a waterproof layer upon veneers (as thin at about as x6 for small a stiff, strong to the at somethickness. which are the the third 45 degrees
to each
adhesive
at 90 degrees architects
specifications,
as many
of thin
are used to build with staples, --set down, As noted epoxies upside
are secured
sometimes
in the section
on adhesives, temperatures,
thus the reason Although methods. framework, which build are The
resorcinots and for the term cold-molding. hulls consists frames) mold. are built used and ribbands. by most and which
up at room
amateurs longitudinal
is to laminate stringers.
method
up a hull
with closely
as bulkheads and transverse frames, are installed combines thcsc two: the first layer of planking framework Each and method then successive layers of planking has definite advantages
as necessary.
Stilt another
is strip-planked applications,
are laid on diagonally. of planking layers. and the The designer draws up his and its purpose of much in scienthat who built
for particular
variations within each method as to skin thickness, number number and weight of internal strengthening members. construction mind. tific research to specify specifications with the intended the cold-molding srantlings The end result In the last decade, hull construction process
has been the subject that desi,gners ratios of Gougcon System. attractions.
and developmem.
with strength-to-wright
approaching
of aluminum. The leader in this field has been the firm devclopc~tt the WEST (Wood Epoxy Saturation Technique) Whatever planking, desired needed materials. the epoxies. that Thus, heightened the method or if desired. rhickness. to construct for many Tied Either chosen. cold-molding can has several be built with a cold-motded skin can be built way, the hull very tight because hull construction is easier
of the laminated up to a that has been with light particularly means than
a wooden because
by the traditional
interest
high quality
closely
stability a tough.
it is possible
strong, methods.
otherwise
>,*, @ *
4 .
PLANKING
15 1
Figure
t l-15.
ihv
/irst
.$kor
hvltrfi
rlpp/ivd
If,
11 /irlnrcwork t~rrz:u~fdl.)
o/
mfdds,
l~rrllrhfwtls,
ccrrrl .strrugf*r.s.
tiowever,
although
is childs
it
SWIII to the amateur that laminating up a hull of thin to bending frames and spiting and cutting out planks, The tines must stilt There to butt is stilt a tightly mold must be constructed. the planks
for skill and care in any facet of boatbuilding. a [rue and sturdy to bc done Indeed, must upon to get the joints between
be accurately
one another.
some professionals have opined go through a complete planking not just once. the number curves but at least three of layers. In addition,
that, to build a cotdroutine for each layer, and perhaps as many some hI1tt shaprs can amount not Reading Yacht of trouble, by be attempted that
as five times.
and onr professional builder has stated anyone less than a realty skilled, patient There by John learned by those are two excellent at considerable and Guzzwrtt about books listed length. Gougcon of experience cold-molding
These
Wocldrn
Construction Much
Thr
deal
Construclion. which
the details
of cold-molding
books.
with a great
152
PLANKING
Figure 11-16.
Diagonal
Although similar done, is that mostly counters fastened the planking
Planking
it predates cold-molding In fact, instrad of fabric by quite as it is practiced soaked than some time, using What and thickness, in shape hulls. clamps, diagonal agent makes planking is very
now.
waterproof
glue between as was formerly it a bit different consists each of only is used en(or
two layers
this method
the change
strake frames
less severe
of diagonal upon
of cold-molding. is secured
chine, and
and
keel or sheer Toward thr topsides amidships. critical, The tween clout tenings puttying planking
the bow, the planks IO change brings is glued as the planks layer
as the convergence
the planks
cross several to the first and clamps. When can of the inner
with screws
to the keel, chines, the intersections the framing are then countersunk.
pressure nailed.
the fasthe
to eliminate
on the outside
has cured,
by sanding.
Chapter
12
DECK FRAMING
The tant
decking
of a boat
beams,
which
support
for
the deck but also help to hold the sides of the hull together. in all boats designed especially in sailboats. powerboats and sailboats that are strength to do without the stiffening hulls the thwarts do double duty
aspect
is impor.
types of small
not decked must be designed to have enough that the deck structure provides. In many such stiffening.
as hull
and the frame member provides is generally it instead In small always whereas used.
material landing
are used as fastenings, advantage beams are not accessible (See Figure
vessels through-bolts
screws through
concentration the clamps single located edges with lengths, toward should a pitch
in the vicinity
in place
joined
to the camber
of the deck
the beams
154
DECKFRAMlh'G
-M
/ / 1 1 /yq /yq
DECK CLAMP
ROLTS lee sceEv.5,+.J CDL*5-e. C~Od) CDL*5-e. C~cd) 4 SHELF DECK BEAll KIT+ KiTi
CLAMP
Figure 12-l.
bear on the shelves few deck beams every station. The Figure 12-2A.) When member found should the clamp great having entire edges and width. The best way to get the bevel may can be measured then together, be planed they every is to temporarily few feet, angle. set a (See
in place
or at least at
bolted stiffness.
angle-shaped are, of course, the twosides with The a to them. through-bolted For a flat at the In this as well.
strength
Such structural
on both sides of a vessel, and to get every bit of benefit be fastened which sawn together at the ends wood laid of the boat. between crook, plate either is a knee of sorts fitted out of a natural is a piece assemblies of oak the shelves
breasthook, hook is often good (Figure transom, and bolted underside Unless
Just as
a connection 12-3A).
on top of the shelves used the same knees, which at the stern
A piece of plywood
or metal
way is also suitable. are sawn from crooks cross framing curve
transom, deck
the connection
is more difficult.
of the deck
FPAMCS AS rs
AICE
FeOM
5tEi.F
BE&L
LOCATI& m AGREE
EDGE
Figure 12-2.
-v;-- -y -: 1.. c-5 * 1; :v:j$ ; I d+J * ,a : --- 7~.-*+& .;*:=-*-q : =-----~-~:- .-m--3 : z _~ r.-:.zsm?--..~ .,p- ~~ - -__I -< 9 : i++:, *..w-:-1:
-7, /F: 1+-x~: Sws~ ,J, !: ::I #===qr ;: ,, :,j;; ; 4 j
156
DECK
FRAMING
I. D,,,de AB A:( c 17 r-o A~J*Ico~~s. STEP Z cl, ,i Al, C-D c-c mo*e *se 35 sbwr and dmr. ~ornkr wr,e yr(+r 0 m*+en.
Figure 12-4.
and boat.
transom The
these
pieces
method. plan for the the or its aft of the the Install of three
is easy to obtain,
as it is shown
for thr* five or six feet ahead on each time side of the centerline, the inside the batten of the transom. is clamped;
underside of the decking as well as the top curve of the quarter knees. The battens can also be used to measure the bevel needed for the aft edges of the knees. Shaped as they are in every dimension, these pieces are really quite a job for the amateur.
Beams deck beams should be made of oak or ash where where comes When lightness aboard. there be cambered, Where an especially is severe maximum strength There and should durabe a exwith in
frame,
for strength
the beams
such as is often
DECK
FRAMING;
157
cabin bent
be steam-bent strength
to shape, to shape.
or over-width Another
method,
has much
of the resulting
is to laminate
glue. Beam construction beams of three or more pieces over a form, using waterproof is shown in Figure 12-4A. Most of the beams will have the same siding, but at hatches, mast partners, than and the ends of cabin the t,egular beams. trunks, the beams 12-3.) should be heavier by about 75 percent (See Figure
Although it is customary to represent the beams and frames on the plans in the manner shown in Figure 12-3, Figure 12-3E shows that the beams must be beveled to fit against planking, combination must This the frame which heads. This is because the centerline and flaring 12-3F. the frames toward are twisted the ends the inboard to lie flat against of the boat. corner instead the curves toward Due to a of a point.
of the clamp
sometimes is sketched
on a flat surface
of so many
inches
or the camber
is self-explanatory and very useful camber. end of thr Then arc. In this beam two are
is suitable
each
at the
straight-edged
longer
the required
placed snugly against the nails the angle between the battens. batten always assembly holding from the battens
as shown and tacked together rigidly enough to hold The camber curve can then be drawn by sliding the to one with end of the beam and then to the other, the nails at the ends.
beams
mentioned
as shown although
12-1A.
by the easier method with the camber clamp them in the (See half
headers beams,
the beams,
is to make
a couple
the header
narrow
158
Db:CK
E;RAMI,YG
beams heads.
replaced piece
as the deck
side deck,
Knees
rather than between large pieces of plywood, or clamps may the deck and the
running
frame stiffening
12-3C). frame
These
also take some of the load off the connections additional be lodging on top to at ends of large or oak crooks or riveted in the deck or at and shelf or
to provide
are bolted
Deck Blocking
Wherever blocks wood there are fittings on deck such as cleats and and tackle blocks, The there should be in
fitted
between
blocks
provide
more
I he case of shearing forces, and over a greater area of decking when upward encountered. The blocks can be of oak. mahogany, or plywood and should on top to conform possible Blocks to the deck are camber best framing. and sawn Figure to a tight 12-3. fit between Whenever bolts. the blocks if through-fastened to the beams
arp shown
in the deck
Mast Partners
The deck the cabin beams. framing trunk, These blocks plan in Figure 12-3 is for a sloop has large made blocks as the depth of hardwood having mast and its mast stepped partners fitted between whether or lodging is laid. through between which located knees, This The sup.
called
as thick
through-bolted.
plcmentary sketrh, Figure 12-3G, shows a set of typical in thr trunk top or the main deck. All comparatively should be coated serves to keep large with thick deck white frame lead there surfaces. or other such bedding
as the decking
out water
should
Haqging
Knees
on a boat by seas and by masts in sailboats work to collapse to the way that a packing box from which the ends have a hull in been re-
DECti
FRAMING
159
+iAC<MATACk.
P OArC KdEE5
HANCLING
tNEE.5
Figure 12-5.
movt-d at thr
collapses deck
when and
a man
stands
on it. These
forces
try to hinge
corner
reasons
why properly
fastenings are important if long hull life is to be expected. Brackets called hanging knees are fitted for resisting such sideways strains. Like lodging knees, they are made of natural Metal, kners knees crook oak or hackmatack plates, and plates are and through-fastened angles, or castings, at the ends knees trunk. insofar as possible. used for of in the form are grnrrally of flanged is often
through
the cabin
Modern Construction
The quarter knees, price 04622.) hackmatack. plates. lodging The for them. It should craft Knees knees, problem (According be realized and hanging knees described magazine, earlier them are used in
construction.
in late 1979. He is Frank are modern the need for traditional of wood or plywood
materials
for small
of oak and
provided by modern materials: of lodging knees, and properly the place of hanging knees.
160
DECKFRAMING
In any details
case,
be guided
by the
plans
boat.
The- designer
should
provide and as is
of the structure
panel
labor savings. If there are a number common consisting heads beams areas. and or in many partitions longitudinals power of two layers
hull,
packed
etc.,
a deck
be supported
with
it is necessary
to reduce
-DECKING
there
are really
kinds
of decking
for a wooden
boat.
The
to make to make
such a deck of waterproof plywood and cover ing, one still used in areas like the Caribbean type boards, deck. enough The sometimes other covered with canvas, is the so-called And type of deck
it with fiberglass cloth. A cheaper dcckislands, is made of tongur-and-groovrsometimes then there not: the latter of narrow is a short-lived strakes sandwich thick deck either waterof both types. laid deck made
to be caulked
for watcartightness.
are variations
(The builder of a boat with a fiberglass hull might opt for a lightweight having fiberglass skins over an end-grain balsa or foam core.) Depending economic smallest tightness. tion boats upon your viewpoint, serves each type purpose of deck chosen, the latter has an or aesthetic. the deck Regardless of the decking the double to safety, remember to comfort
of providing
contribute
as well.
Deck boards from make an inexpensive deck because the width of the
4to 6, permits
built,
parallel to the centerline of the boat as in Figure IS-IA. Very often these decks are made of non-durable material, unseasoned in the first place, and quick to rot if the deck groove covering tends leaks. to warp The straight-run deck is not (Figure as strong that as other types and the for a
161
tongue-and-groove
construction between
the thin
upper
edge of the
only covering
162
DECKING
rEC& *i 3CCu.
9EA.4, kc%
TOriGjE ~__
4 GPOOVE
DE&K
Figure
SrEieP-p,f~L C>ECh *.PltJL ,P 5-3 -~ . ..--11\ 7 \+.. ml! h, .VCP . BLOC* \,-neo *3-, .
deck of wide boards canvas duck. life is shortened that will come and go easily with the moisture shows through the ridges. and the to the canvas along The groove by wearing warping
Unless the boards are laid in single lengths, these should be scattered as much as possible. butt beam. planking age, leak. drive. cost. these ends must Instead, butt have be well fastened, the ends blocks. decks are fastened upward and better nails. and are fastened between
there must be joints in the decking, For strength and to prevent curling, to make beams such a butt to blocks nails, the deck similar
it is not practical
on a deck
galvanized
a way of working
in the canvas,
A tongue-and-groove in time
this is doubtful.
Deck type of decking shown in Figure 13.IC is strong, rather quickly laid,
when the deck is *c, thick or better. The strakes are usually square, or a little wider than their thickness, and for maximum rigidity they are of the deck edge. It is best to cut any laid decking from rift-sawn
to the curve
DECKING
163
and
up,
will be a minimum Figure 4-3.) Galvanized they are hidden nonferrous and toenailed slightly when Monel
of and or
the width
not exposed
to sea water.
other
It is good The
below finished.
of planking. is built
If a strip-built
(Chapter ll), it will be enormously strong if the seams are fitted reasonably tight. After being planed smooth and sanded, such a deck can either be painted or covered with light fiberglass cloth and then painted.
Plywood
A main rangement strength openings panels under tioned.
Deck
deck or cabin for the deck in the deck top of marine of plywood and plywood must cockpit, at masts is strong, light, and quickly to provide into with taking laid. The armaximum consideration the size of the of lodging racking knees was mcn-
of the pieces
of material,
available. Following
in construction horizontal
reasoning.
the plywood should be cut so scams do not come The butts should the beams whrrr Joint locabeams, beams the putty, with Monet oak. due
at the ends of large openings in the drck as shown in Figure 13-2. overlap as shown in thP skctrh. and joints should be located bctwern the panel tions because The with ends can this adds deck rlosrly panels spaced br sccurety scirw if thr considerably should flat-head fastened to a butt is waterproof strength. the edges and along nails. block are not as important plywood glued
underneath.
threaded
fastening heads slightly below the surface non-oil base if the deck is to be covered A well-fitted non-ferrous staples driven plywood staples. deck properly up to Plywood
and cover them over with a surfacing with fiberglass cloth and resin. to the deck framing can be fastened The coating staplers. can be fastened with coated increases
glued
I,$ thick
by compressed-air-powered
the staples
holding power so it is just about impossible to withdraw these staples from whitr When a plywood deck is specified to be :?$ R in thickness or more, the curvature to camber ficult and sheer might make laying the deck in a single that thickness either or even impossible. which As soon as it is obvious be done should by using be waterproof the flat panels thickness, together
very difof
to the surface,
a double glued
% or x plywood, st rengt 4.
Canvas Covering
Plywood and laid economics--
Decks
with fiberglass, covered with of decks but inasmuch is still worthy as I recently of mention. saw both plywood of
canvas
in the Caribbean-~
;)robabiy
because
covering
164
DECKING
COVEk3ZD
DECK
PLANICSHEEEZ
cCn.,VAS ob? FtBCKGLAS5
-,
PLnuwLFuEER
.\ * COPAMOk, At&
I I _____ t
ifn
~.-~ V4PNGED)
lUTED
062
l-rvjoJD
JR
TOtiirLJE
M&,ODTYPE ~~DEC< ;
I
---___----_
.AWtchinq
ml4
lldil
- Seun-
kc,ITlri OVTrr KIT* iLnrE:Y , 4iED 5rEtr.S TORLOCL DECV.IUG IbTr.2E.d ECr. RE4W CTFl?Oh\ pL,bQ,-..o iAriELS ,h
Figure
13-2.
should be had,
be bought width
deck in one If a to
if possible,
allowing
enough
get a sailmaker
to sew two strips are shown to lothere and in the even which
use sewn canvas, tack it on the centerline skctrhcs in Figure 13.2B. The 12-ounce cements weight of the that canvas varies from for decks are liable
to get considerable
Although
are canvas
on the market,
it is recommended
marine
paint,
should bc applied to the deck immediately paint is smooth so there will be no lumps reason, be sure the canvas moist the is clean. that Select risk of applying loose covering. First stretch stretched canvas
a dry day for the laying, or else you run the in a will stretch later, when it dries out, resulting aft this along the centerline. a two-man The job. canvas should be ac-
canvas
as tight
as possible,
is at least
It is better
DECKING
165
complished worked edges should spaced After the boat the edges.
by rolling and
of the canvas
around which
sticks so that
more
by just your two hands. it with tacks, steel or even galvanized, the pressure. working until amidships, the canvas for cabin
of the boat
will be hidden
by moldings.
the ends are fastened, tacking Where the canvas stretch has been Believe before deck
side of the openings, will be turned When coat further paint flat paint an effort canvas the canvas shrink
up inside
to apply
it or not,
one of the best methods is dry. At any time it will start later,
and stretch
can be added,
to crack early
Covering
1 am going such disagreement
as plywood
(Chapter
11). There
t hcsr surfaces:
then saturated with resin, or should the bare wood be coated with resin. and the glass cloth laid in the tacky resin, smoothed. and immediately saturated with another coat of resin? applied There adherence Ask an experienced covering that supplier of these materials from or someone you know who has has not delaminated the wood.
seems to be no disagreement over the fact that epoxy resin has the best to wood nr over the fact that the wood surface must be clenrr. Any oil-based of fastenings or in cracks must be removed to bare wood and material. A materials supplier can sell you powders to mix with it for use as a putty. can be mixed with like plywood surface For instance, the resin. with a single sanded. smooth, a fiberglass primer bright, etc., being the layer with of cloth, with corstrips. The boat, reinforced doubling for an epoxy putty, a white
putty over the heads replaced with another the resin Stable ners, such adhesion to thicken called Cabosil surfaces powder
of a v-bottomed
if rough sanded
Fiberglass used first. If the cabin decks should everything the fabric tapering The
before
installation method
joinerwork.
the watertight
is to build
fabrics
strengthening
making
v~ill be painted.
166
DECKING
Decks
with
Planksheer old-fashioned deck edge is sawn bounded to shape and marking of the deck, is obtained variation as illustrated from by laying the edge unless of the completely or contrasting by Figure and the canvas-covered colored This segments covering piece, are joined 13-2C. deck called is a a
by a varnished
Its shape
on the deck
as shown
assemble
draw in the tapered width with When the deck is sufficiently screw fastened the planksheer stopped planksheer can from is fairly narrow,
they are is
underneath
on edge. The
at the edge
in either
of two ways.
be rabbeted
the fabric
down
tacked, and the groove filled with a tightly fittt=d batten of wood planksheer. Another way is to employ a toe rail set al the inner edge of as shown in Figure 13-2E. The fabric is tacked along the edge and the 13-2F shows the tened over the fabric with plugged screws. Figure mc~thod of finishing oak molding. the edgr of a fabric-covered deck with a half-round
The outermost strakc of a stx-ip-built deck is edge fastened to the planksheer for support, but the outer cdgcx of a tongue-and-groove deck would bc sprung downward if stepped canvas splitting on brt ween fiberglass the edge when, beams covering where unsupported, To prevent this, there perhaps to the extent of tearing the a tongue-and-groove deck is not recommended-and and also to support the ends of the must be blocks fitted between the
of the decking.
Decks are IWO types of caulked difference, deck weight is important, decks. In larger yachts, where weight does not make is laid. In smaller boats, 1 thick and upward is laid over a sub-deck of marine plywood. the conbefore;
too much
planking thinner
decking
A tyllical laid and caulked deck is drawn in Figure 13-3 for a sailboat and The planksheer is fitted first as described struction also applies to powerboats. thtsn thy narrow strakes are sprung parallel to the edge of the planksheer. for the narrow strakes are twofold: the narrow material will not shrink must be clear and should
The reasons
they may bc sprung without too much trouble, and and swell much or check. The wood for a laid deck Any joints are located so they are quite far
be in long lengths.
apart in adjacent strakes. The wood must be rift sawn so the grain can be laid on edge, because flat grain will eventually lift and splintera condition that is both unsightly and hard cedar, and on bare Burma feet. Suitable teak. The woods last named are good white pine, Douglas fir, Port Orford by far is the best and, like most good things,
hJ0CMA.L SCAM
od
-GAULIcIdG
SEAMS-
Uh
6Erc
ICAL
bAiCpE d-IV SCAMS Ruti
-CAUU&D
LAID DECK-L--
-ObCdcldDER lD -YAK?? FA5TEhlldG5 Iti hhS ErlDS L STCA&S HERRNG 00dtD AT %-rz~P-BUILT DECK) BR tJIbbE!D IIJ-IU STCAIGW OR TAPCREO IdlhJO PLAhJ<
-. CL. (sac
Figure 13-3.
168
DECKING
the most expensive. does not have bleach equal Teak trim there to teak. decks
It has a natural
and it
to be varnished
or painted.
it out to a whitish
with its long life, there is no deck quite but since so much antiseptic put on the market. standard watertight, practice teak Most was
do not look well if neglected, boats to offset their otherwise systems and treatment
appearance,
of them Until
are easy to use. up new seam compounds, for caulking 13-3. seam to make them The seams were glue, a preparation thiokol-based tape. The seam as shown
to bevel the edges by the enlarged paying simple, secured, regular keeping
space was left for what the seams. square seams the glue hardened. the open
with cotton, and to make it run for away after in and is laid that can be run applied
The seams were over-filled Now there seams are available with like the one shown are masked
and the excess was scraped After filler the decking is then
in the figure.
with a
household-type caulking gun. Care must be taken to avoid air bubbles by the tip of the cartridge at the root of the seam so it is filled from the bottom a very sharp chisel is
up. The seams are over-filled and the excess filler is cut off with after the thiokol has completely cured a few days after paying. A 1 /R * or 114 0 thick deck will have strakes about 1 W II wide, about right as the thickness of the decking becomes greater that will specify what your architect wants. It is suggested listed in the table, Figure 6-2. The screws will be countersunk
in larger boats. Your plans you use flat-head screws as and plugged with bungs
of the same wood as the decking, and due to the size of the plug, there will be room for just one fastening at each deck beam. Note in Figure 6-2 that the screw gauge may be reduced for decking, in Figure deck resulting or nibbed in a smaller into a king bung plank at times. at the centerline way there must opening parallel like be is as drawn. Either next It is noted the strip-built blocks under seams made wider, 1.3-3 that the strakes may be herringboned
to let deck
run under
the decking
are run
requiring
a lot of fitting
the planksheer
a margin
to blocks planking
a laid deck over a sub-deck laid deck, with the beams. The decking
is similar
exception
the strakes
are not
to deck
of proportions,
should be thicker than the plywood sub-deck; as would be covered with a 5/gn a 3/gti fir plywood sub-deck
,pc~ !
DECKING
169
thick
teak overlay.
fastening
if desired
the teak to the plywood the sub-decking builders (without cient As an alternate, allowing
from
underneath.
be a leak in the seams of the teak cloth be laid covered but effective
the /eWthickness
mentioned
above manner.
Chapter
14
amount likr
and
character cabin
will vary with the type of boat. coamings. while larger yachts
Open might
a deckhouse. your
watertight because.
work should
cockpit, and bulwark rail. This regardless of how well you have
the occasional
will make
on thr appearancr* of the deck structures. nothing looks wet-se than bare and stained dirty paint. Even though it is said that
a snap appraisal of your boat based too, is necessary, for Pr0pf.r maintenant-c*. woodwork. peeling varnish, or scarred and btb judged by its cover. my ad-
a book cannot
\ice is to take a great deal of care when finishing parts that meet the eye and to keep them shipshape. A discussion about finishing follows, because the builder must keep thinking joinerwork. about the ultimate appearance while doing ever); hit of the exposed deck
with
Varnish the finest yachts had vast areas of varnished reasons, any large areas deck joinerwork of varnished fine of teak or woods are
Today,
for various
most likely to he faces of plywood rather than solid lumber, and hopefully the faces are of veneers thick enough to survive a few refinishings to bare wood. Nowadays, varnished Teak wood and (brightwork) mahogany is limited to trim hard initially moldings and resistant used to accent fore-and-aft but either of lines such as the sheer of the hull. are moderately Their to scarring, though, natural appearance, finish. has appeal to many,
them can be dented and such a finish open grain 170 that must
by abuse.
DECK
JOINERWORK
171
while
paste
to a perfectly
i 2 filler, appearance,
to dry to a dull
off across the grain with clean cotton waste or rags. This is easy After a day of drying, the first coat of varnish can be applied. be sanded a finish and with a fine-grade while what abrasive. Repeat for six coats that you will be proud varnishing. opinionated of varnish used, people who freely hand brand, or a mixcoats to kill kind to use. As you become of varnishing to show off. The work and
this is dry, it should you will have be clean amount area must
The waterfront out an enormous more ture remain of brands. the same:
and boatyards
of advice
you, too, may also swear by a particular of the kind absence of varnish of moisture, and sanding
the gloss.
Finishing
There th-:. pine wood. nished. because well.
with Paint
Jy. painting in Chapter 16. but 1 merely want to point out here abr..* ...aurni you may he painting wood deck joinerwork, such as Philipinstead of varn:- fir or Duraply plywood, or fiberglass-covered mahogany (solid fJr plywood), is a section For the finest With This appearance, finish, below grade out and indeed an all-paint finish can be very attractive as if it were to be varneed not be plugged, putty will do as glazing is thin. apply a second undercoater, the wood must be just as smooth the heads of screw fastenings the surface working paint. and covering with sand material smooth, Start that apply
with a polyester
when
Use only compound glaze coat. craft marine hren If you superior again Sand and
of marine
with an undercoater,
irregularities,
and sand lightly and carefully before painting the first finish to kill the gloss, then apply a second coat of finish. the highly marketed previous reasonably touted 10 years form the affluent, applicator two-part polyurethane coatings used on airin brushable form by several or so, this high-gloss, firms catering to the durable coating had application. can not result in a truly proper)
Starting
are brave
button-bursting
Cabin Trunk
The plans
and
Cockpit Coaming
boat will show you the kind of cabin and coamings (along with
of your
heights and half-breadths), type of toe or bulwark rail, size and location and other related information: the best 1 can do is discuss joinerwork general. depending tion The largest side, structure you will tackle is the to make cabin both trunk, coaming upon the design. If the curve of the cockpit coaming
of hatches, details in
on deck is a continua-
of the cabin
172
DECK
.JOINER
WORK
COAM
!hiG
Figure
14-1.
piece
as in Figure
14-1A.
Long,
wide longer
mahogany than
boards
can be made
the board
glued splines. can be made The shape overlap drrk where The and opening
If the cabin side is to be of plywood up in the same way. of the bottom and scribed down be planed work screws. edge of the cabin side, with a template to the shape. from the plans. the corners that was truly to the camber of thin Remember
whether wood
it is to rest on the deck or held in place extra at the from the mold a little loft floor, on the top exacting practice them and with after toward for
carefully
The top edge is taken to leave top. -~ almost of the trunk of the trunk a sight rabheted the corner
edge so it can
dovetailed
time-consuming
to behold--
is to fit the ends into suitably (See Figure deeper by /,,,I or so than
14-1B and C.) When thickness to a perfect fit. being vertical, should from appearing inboard are often headers to lean more
posts, make
assembly, work off the radius corner The sides of the cabin, rather than fhc ccn(erlr~c~ slightly aesthetic the cabin joint bright, the cabin cabin 14-2C. up against reasons sides for the amateur is difficult making to keep them the cabin builder. inside
inboard
Sometimes
the deck
as shown
unless
sides are to be finished to fit and bed With a laid it is best to set the in Figure
impractical,
watertightness. covered
or fiberglassed. as sketched
and caulked
a rabbeted
sill piece
DECKJOINERWORK
173
.Sli
/ N eoaer
Fe cafqr:
SlmE 15 l-rritd
LIA0LE
ICAti
Figure 14-2.
When fastened trunk sides of solid lumber Drilling must are specified beam to be as thick header, done as 1 /I , they should to ruin the lumber. be in-
be very carefully
When the cockpit coaming is thinner than the cabin side, make it out of a separate piece and let it into the trunk dt the after end as shown in Figure 14-1D. When the cabin and the coaming are not in a continuous to the cabin sides through a rabbcted block. Strangely built through counting enough, 1 have seen only one the samr top, the cabin labor. sides, nailed the trunk amateur and glued curve, the coaming Figure i4-1E. trunk of this type. With is usually that fastened had stripdiswas
cabin
for a sailboat
as planking
I saw, female
which the strips were clamped very strong. Sometimes curve whether bend solution the intersection like that edges, plank
,+JAiiED
the work went quickly roof and sides is desi,gned 14-3. or even more it might in plan be impossible
in Figure planked.
so. Depending
Figure 14-3.
:<: \,
( I-
:I
by
174
DECK
JOINER
WORK
Toe Rail
Small foothold sailboats when are fitted with toe rails on deck and from The (Figure 14-4A) that inboard are used as a
the boat
is heeled,
to be looked
on as be-
of the deck
edge of the covering board, as mentioned in Chapter 13, and the butting pieces are screws. Where jcints are necessary, cut at and near The the low point face. of the toe and spray will drain often from they overboard. are tapered rails may be of the same Small they taper, the heights
throughout,
on the inside
end to end,
but frequently
!.J-
.-. .-
n-s
cs
Figure 14-4.
Bulwark
Larger tapered
Rail
have what is called a bulwark rail. always 14-4B. tapered Bulwark in height strake. and usually by
boats
in thickness.
Details every
in Figure
drift bolts run about with a neatly for economy. is scuppered pers (pipes
shaped cap, screw fastened and plugged. The cap is sometimes omitted Joints in both rail and cap are always scarphrd and the bottom of the rail to drain that drain water that otherwise from the would deck be trapped on deck. through the If no deck scuphull near the water overboard
waterline) are fitted, then the bottom of the rail scuppers must be at the deck level to drain rainwater. When there are deck scuppers, the bottom of the cuts in the rail are placed scuppers about tm above the deck so that ordinary rainwater and across will not run the transom through into as shown the the in to streak the topsides with dirt. The forward end of the rail is fitted
at the stem
DECK
JOiNERWORK
175
of the
bulwark
rail
for
some
ingenuity and
on
the
part
of the
Templates
should
be of thin
sprung
in place,
on the botare laid out the template Bear in is. the rail is
at the stations
and a batten
is run to fair the top of the rail. of the problem a normal sides and boat; the outside face of the rail conforms
It will be a problem
changes.
Jigs from
the cabin
thus the bottom edge bevel constantly coamings and across the fore and after decks
must be devised to hold the template in place, and then the rail while fastening. It is very likely that at least the forward section of the rail will need steaming to get it in place, joints and much care must be taken to fair the rail sections into each other at the so they will be smooth.
Bulwarks for the larger boats can indeed try the patience of the inexperienced builder. In certain cases, laminating can eliminate some of the heavy work. However, laminating laminate requires bulwarks a jig. which when more takes some planning than one boat and time to construct: (See Figure it is best to 4-4D.) is to be built.
Monkey
Powerboats handy chocks
Rail
are dressed and up with dock lines. a short monkey rail forward, in a heavy Figure can 14-4C. This is
when
handling
an anchor
sea and
be fitted
with
Sliding
A sliding The
Hatch
hatch must is necessary be rugged to give headroom enough over companion of a man better ladders sitting and elsewhere. or standing on like the deck.
hatch
it. The
when cambered
It can be of plywood, either one or two layers, but is usually made of solid lumber, as shown in Figure 14-5. The cover is made on a pair of beams sawn to the camber, using edges grooved for soft white material /; thick and about 3 wide, with the butting pine splines, glued The which tongues tected The that and which stiffen the top piecrs to make ends the hatch are fastened than others. as well as prevent to the beams A common while leaks. The joints with plugged in Figure in sketch are waterproof 14-5, some of A with brass with screws.
in a variety
in the logs. The edge of the cover is prothe tops of the logs are sheathed to keep spray out of the hatch opening.
brass strips
arrangement in sketch B is similar in operation, having a rabbeted beam header slides in the log groove. The top of the log may be sheathed if desired, and the
molding on the edge of the cover makes it adaptable to canvas covering. The logs shown in sketches C and D do not have grooves, for the covers slide directly on the logs, making friction project it necessary is minimized slightly, to sheathe by having them to prevent between wear of the surface.
SO
an angle
edge only.
In D there is a piece of brass let into the cover at the ends only, so the wooden cover will not touch
arrangements
176
DECh
~J~~i!VER
WORK
Figure 14-5.
in the sketches steel, but brass length Beyond An elevation 14.5. The opening. by the distance are typical is quite and others easy to work. of a sliding hatch hatch beyond cover beam with plugged is illustrated by sketch E, Figure the companionway to the forward screws. is determined end of the hatch Fasten water. sliding edges of the can be devised. The metal parts can be stainless
with an ogee curve. The bottom to drain trapped alloy and Lexan
logs just forward of the apron must have scuppers cut in them In the end, it can sometimes be less costly to buy aluminum companionway Charlestown. hatches made hatches, such New Hampshire by Bomar and as those made by 03603. The sliding others. Bomar, hatches
Companicmway
The simplest take a brass
Closure
the opening as shown screwed The in the aft end of the trunk to the bottom of the hatch is to fit drop cover beam, boards or a
way of closing guides, be fitted. running locking air through from substituted tongue
in Figure
14-5. A slot can be cut in the top slide to also have ventilation up. A shaped deck into the cabin. holes or louvers on the deck doors Double
sill is fitted
to keep water
Hatches
Openings At sea, in the deck are covered particularly, hatches with hatches that leak are made an to be watertight or reasonably making so. for
unspeakable
nuisance,
DECK
JOINERWORK
177
6-l
hATCH
CDAMI~G
CDPdElZ
-I I
D 0
COU LIGHT
HUSlc\/ HAl-Ctl
BROhlzE HlblGE
SECT:
-l-HRU
HATCH
0
II
Figure
14-6.
during
the watch
below,
should
be exerted frame
to construct around
them
satisfactorily. (here,
the cover are preferably the cover is which so that all I in used from apart. dovetails that shown In other
14-6 be followed.
the end screws in the top pieces are in the side frame the swelling screws across of the top in width the width will force of the top must
be in the same
of frame.
The hatch coamings either through-bolted corners as shown In fact, Use either Sketch although modified of the hatch in sketch bedding
vary in detail according to preference or practice, but all are or fastened from the bottom with long, husky screws. The coamings are dovetai!ed together or rabbeted bedding under and screw fastened on the deck. fitted on deck. 14-6, and set in marine is used to keep out water bedding sealant compound eveything
such as 3M Number
5200 or a thiokol-
base compound. a crude workboat-type C are used, they are like D, which hatch not very suitable for a yacht, and too light to be any good and should be and is fairly watertight when
178
DECK
-JOINER
WORK
I_
#LE.
1-A
2. , 4. J6. 7. 8.
*(a. I AL41 $,: , ; RF?..-r PEec f> 777 . bSE. **l ICC.. -re r ?Y z j*. 1. UA435 I2 .,A.,> C.rT c AC. 4 Ig ..A..--k>W
-E-
Figure
14-7.
down.
The
type shown
in sketch
E has
the
coaming shown
It is a mistake
up to the abuse
The hinges shown are made by a couple of the marine satisfactory. Through-bolt the hinges wherever possible. 14-7 is shown like the galley. hatch jump with with a plastic Unless top. This material is optional, a strong such as Lexan deck of a sailboat force. If a light
hardware firms and are quite Note that the hatch in Figure a lot of light a crewman in a wooden to spaces is liable main to is used, where it is a bit risky to use a deck in the marine at both the The tight good The side. down
but it admits
a plastic
on the hatch
is wanted frame. a
hatch, it is safer to use a round hatch section in Figure 14-6. When plywoodforward individual covers the deck joinerwork if fir-is fiberglassed pins
painted,
satisfactory.
the hatches
and after sides, which with a removable from below fastener must hatches, are locked located builder priced
by fitting brass
and replacing
eyes, or dogged
F (available
hardware
at the corners
the hinges.
of buying
hatches value,
of making mostly
of which
are good
are made
of molded
p!Lstic. Hatches :,f cast aluminum alloy frames with strong lights of polycarbonate sheet such as Lexa;l are considerablv more expensive. Some of these hatches are designed with sailboats in mind and have a minimum number of protrusions so that sails can be hurriedly passed through the hatch without Some complain that the plastic-topped hatches sweat, catching on anything. and this is also true of metal
DECK
,JOlNER
WORK
179
hatches. tirely
Sweating
hatches
can
reduced - wood.
or stopped
ena
by applying
it is possible
tc make
minimum-sweating Flush Cockpits washdown This usual sha!low enough at least. Hatches usually water method gutters
have from
flush
hatches
tanks,
and storage
spaces
are constructed
as shown
in sketch
to keep rain.
on equipment
or much
it does not take much water to overflow the A better method is to use a system of to clog the drain. attached and having to the hatch opening overboard framing, wide a good-sized line, say 1%U
channel-shaped to project
the opening,
Watertight
A watertight with scuppers of the cockpit teak. The boat
Self-Bailing
cockpit to drain can plans
Cockpit
in sailboats whether is simply plywood, a well sunk preferably below made main non-skid, and whether <eck level or bare or not
as fitted water,
it bf: from
scuppers
they should be crossed, that is, whether the port scupper discharges through the hull on the starboarrt side and vice versa. There arc various ways to fit scuppers flush with the cockpit marine cockpit sole; probably outfits. drain the easiest Above rapidly is to buy ta.:sh-fitting should aboitrd. scuppers from one of the sized so that the hardware well would all, the scuppers be generously
lhe cockpit sole is laid on beams that may extend to the hull sides, or it may be supported by beam headers, which in turn are suspended from the main deck headers by long rods with threaded ends for nuts. (See Figure 14-&I.) Two types of water tables around the edges of the sole are shown, either of which may be used with a caulked sole. The cockpit access Many feeling seats beams main to storage prefer of security ceiling spaces cockpit may be permanently not occupied seats lowered If the boat in order if sloped by fuel below instaiied and water the main or fitted tanks, with hinged exhaust doors for piping, must They etc. plan The require the with
it gives.
not to restrict
for support,
of which to drain
1478B.) Sloped
seats must be scuppered with copper hinged sections over storage spaces.
occurs
solid lumber
and plywood.
this is to make
180
DECK
JOINERWORK
r7fl-lobJAL: f$T.Ed=?D
RCA -I?2 H
FAORiC
CAULVfSP
SdE
5-CUPPER
0 0
Figure
14-8.
&GPCE \ i i-E 3 t..,c .w crrr ilr -..-i.EC LIP
-CLL.YT
63 ll
Figure 14-9.
to the long
direction
This
is in
saw or with
a portable
as shown
Sheer Guards
The hull guard half round hulls. The latter at the sheer of the boa?, for smaller type can be difficult if it is deslgneA U Lzvl une, cxn vary from a simple boats to a izirly heavy, built-up guard for larger to make and install, considering the shape of the
GY rectangle
DECK
JOINERWORK
181
bevel of the sections of the boat from bow to stern. The having a full deck line for they to the shape of the dec : line and
most difficult job is to install a guard at the bow of a powerboat forward and a lot of flare: a guard must be laminated are there for the purpose of protecting upon to do some work. Lower guards to protect securely fastened. which,
sawn to the bevel of the sections. The fastenlng of guards is very important,
the hull and must not come loose when called home (hull wider
hulls at the stern where there is tumble upon the construction are preferably
below the sheer than at the sheer) take some hard knocks at times and also must be Depending guards, of the hull and deck at the sheer, the sheer guard sometimes for heavy-duty needs blocking between the frames to take the fastenings, through-bolts.
Chapter
15
INTERIOR
JOINERWORK
of this manual
that
the builder
is familiar
and
The joints and finish can with the ability of the builder. of sections but rhrough methods, in case these
be as plain should
drawings
or sparse,
I will show
some typical structural details to be planned, time around. few bulkheads and fronts, finished and lockers,
methods. In a small craft there are not too many different although there might seem to be a multitude of them the first to sleep four or more joinerwork work top, and parts and persons consisting by neat-fitting sandpaper there are only a tops Any and pays the rest of the interior the galley of cabinet of berth ice box. joints really
carpentry
in the nature
work is enhanced
a smooth finish, so the time spent in fitting off iiith the satisfaction of a job well done. Waterproof this material than fabricated plywood makes interior saves labor by permitting from narrow boards. made of plyivobd
work much easier than in years past because parts to be quick!y cut from large sheets rather Bulkheads are a good exam- . --- an-d-large p+tions -.-. in a fraction of the time formerly needed to make material, and plywood is by all means basic types. a
ple, as these catibe them either more The Assuming attractive that than
of paneling
plywood
most, attractive
of these
finish.
by using
teak, or other such veneers finished with multiple coats wool between coats.
with fine
or bronze
f!TERIOR
JCIAER
WORh
181
with wax-based by hand surface until be made The must to match to make choice wood
material, should
tung
The being
tung
can be applied
wiped
be allowed lumber
buffed around
is pleasing.
locker
etc.,
as the plywood
the like are best covered who has the time. or a combination finish,
wood decor
is to go with a completely such as mahogany. is recommended, of the wood. the galley counter
natural
For a painted
plywood
it will save one or more coats t,f paint most of the surfaces flats that receive other
it is practical Formica.
A third choice is to cover most of the vertical washable vinyl wall coverings and to paint the parts a harmonizing Formir,a be natural vertical covered wood surfaces, color. Again, the horizontal The trim can surfaces or painted. finish. finish either is to use Formica in colors as much grains. or wood
surfaces with one of the tough, that are not practical to cover with that take wear to match and tear should be or contrast, or it can
be painted
Still another
word Formica is a trade name for but one of a number of brands of phenolic finishing materials available. It is a little tricky IO work with until you get used to it, but an attractive and unusually contact durable cement, finish which results. The panels are adhered to clean plywood to set up with so-called is applied to both surfaces and allowed
dry to the touch, before the surfaces are joined. Once the two cement-coated surfaces contact each other. they are stuck for good. so they must be carefully positioned. One method of preventing of brown premature paper contact is to use what is known part as a slip sheet, to be cemented. made The of a piece the same size as the Formica
cement-coated surfaces ate allowed to set up dry to finger touch, the slip sheet is laid on the wood while the Formica is lined up perfectly, and then while holding the parts aligned, joined. Plywood specify
l,,, ( & :t:,
is pulled
out
from
between
so the parts
can
be
of joinerwork;
weight is
in the fortn of furniture the thickness U in the larger t/s in any boat
minor
partitions
over
is desired. Shelves in lockers and elsewhere sense, because with the area. Be guided by common
glued and screwed parts, high strength can be achieved with plywood structures. Sometimes in sailboats the mast is stepped on deck and somehow the thrust must be carried to the hull. In some cases the bulkheads in the immediate vicinity of the mast are used for this purpose: When bulkheads the pieces must be joined. thus they may are larger The simplest be heavier than than normal. one plywood panel, and strip of plywood glued or partitions can be cut from
184
INTERIOR
JOINER
WORK
I I \\ r
Figure 15-l.
lJ 0 .li \ F
screwed to the buikhead pieces, but this does not look good unless it can be concealed from view. The neatest butt is made with a splint as shown in section A of Figure 15-l. using a glued panels plywood accurately circular spline, or have them but you must a mill together, have cutting This the woodworking Still another in Figure the scarph is shown machinery to cut two for the rabbets plywood a portable Sections bulkheads, space shown good have Another rails that cleaned should portable do it for you. way to join 4-6.
is to scarph
with an attachment
saw called
a Scarffer.
B through E in Figure 15-l show different while F is a vertical section through a galley at the base of the counter detail been to incorporate brought down or even is well worth in sketch is shown to counter higher when
ways of building corners for or bathroom counter. The toe it takes to construct. 15-l. This shows sea dirt to be and like a tg enable G of Figure ends
the trouble
1 high,
Where berth against the hull, ing planking. templates. athwartships must carpenters horizontal
platforms, shelves, and the edges of bulkheads and partitions lie their edges are curved and must be fitted by a process similar to spilThis requires the accurate be held use of heavy part, results, normal cardboard the template while Similarly, or light board wood must for making be held of dividers points level or a for a
In the case of a horizontal for the most compass must to the centerline scribing
the template
board
for a bulkhead
be held normal
the points
to the centerline
when scribing
for a bulkhead.
If these procedures
are not followed, the parts will not be correctly shaped, and further fitting will. be required. The bevels for the parts can be taken off at intervals and marked on the template (See Figure Bulkheads bulkhead board. 15-2.) are often located on one side or another of a frame. Fastening a to a frame The template board is cut to the scribed line and used as a pattern.
is simple . lun!ess the flame is not plumb vertical, whi.ch is often the case -when the frames are bent rather than sawn. In such cases, the frame must be shimmed to true up the bulkhead. Thus, when framing a boat, it pays to be particu-
~?CRlRlkl~
OF
FQR
!?ULIdHHF,rlD
~HAPC
t4017MAL C.L.
To OF BOA-l--
TCRI~ING
Q-~APE
FotZ
Figure
15-2.
186
INl-ERIGR
JOINER
WoRK
,/CLEAI?AUCE
.A FACE
-:
l7~~hEC
CcL.;T~UCT
IOtd
B 0
For bulkheads ones, located can a strip for
Figure
15-3.
to have the bulkhead a strip similar IO the inside steam to the hull. cold either
frames to a frame
be as true as possible. must be installed but where saw a frame edge. and a strip using from
frames,
so that there
In v-bottomed bend
round-bottomed to shape,
in a strip where it
by numerous
(See Figure
The spacing
of the cuts is determined be visible are have 15-X Drawers They must best made
in the cabin. of solid to prevent detail steel woodwork with 191 for the fronts, opening t,$ sides, and for a bottom a device of t/t plywood section nails or hardboard through they Masonite. at sea. (See Figure 15-3B.) a berth. Where nails are used, In are hot-dipped by the trim. 6r concealed Plugs varnish. pulls, or lock sets, to be brass or should galvanized. In varnished by matching in varnished such as tempered
in interior
are screws for the most part. unless can and Glue be hidden plugged or spar
of the fastenings are counterbored set below Plastic hardware, Although Resin
if the fastenings
the surface
of the wood.
work are set in either Do not expect survive for long bronze. e;Ler
plated-steel in a boat.
plain
or chrome-plated
INTERIOR
JOINFB
WORK
187
Meta I qril Ia
Loud-e5
JXXX &tXlfsAT~Oti
Figure 15-4 I
Ventilation
Proper while ventilation keeping fresh that of the hull is one of the most important boat. Passage of air must the boat devices water the boat Other from entering may be kept than developed patented in Chapter and lockers, items that will conribute for at all times, trapped. (It must etc., to be the a be
the long lift of a wooden remembered protected most baffle side, openings practical against
all the
or a slip, un-
plastic,
the out-
and where
are watertight,
must be provided with a source of air for ventilation. and cupboards should have vents for passage of air at top and botof the hull, they but also so clothes and other stowed gear door to difto dry out before mildew. A few suggestions for locker
ventilation and typical door frame Ventilation is also of importance minimize ficult the chance of mildew to remove.
are shown in Figure 15-4. of materials other than wood are sometimes extremely
and musty
which
188
INTERIOR
.JOINER
WORK
=e
.---*--
e,--,~+
r- r c--r
03
Figure 15-5.
Ceiling
Ceiling is a lining on the inside of the hull that is used to conceal to protect stowed gear from sloshing bilge water. or to strengthen ter purpose, planking. wedged tightly in larger It is spiled together bevelrd yachts to shape before so that the ceiling when fastening. is usually 40 percent the hull f... ~VZ? requires structural the hull. members, For the latof the are
the strakes
For appearance,
the inner
ing are lightly the outside yachts quarters. two brlow In snlall pearance prevents the
the seams form a vee on the inside. or treated upward bored and plugged from where
and before
be visible
sole, to an inch or
is sometimes your
discomfort
of frames
reasons for ceiling m small boats is to protect tom of lockers from being wetted by sloshing in a lump and-groove strength, fastened into place, perforated In boats In boats of a sea. For this purpose can with be used. Small and excessive nails where This with thickness boat ceiling
gear stowed under berths and in the botbilge water when the boat is heeled down seams should cedar in Figure must be tight, light, and thin tonguelittle be kept 15-5. it, a sheet-type the latter than being ceiling either is bent plain or in for it adds
the ceiling
White
or pine is suitable
and may be
is shown
of the topsides
will permit
or hardboard. rather
where
motorboats-light plywood lining used to hide structures can be painted or covered with vinyl fabric or Formica-type material. The inside of fiberglass hulls, particularly can be covered with carpeting stuck to the forward where hull curvature is greatest, hull with an adhesive, or there are hull backing. liners now made for this purpose. These materials are vinyl with a foam
Cabin Sole
Cabin hatches sole is the proper to enable ready name access for the flooring to the bilge, or decking piping, inside valves, the hull. It must have tanks, etc. In small boats a
,qy%yg~*p g&~~&;~
~>*;a
-719 -
<-,- ; r-%
I I
INTERIOR
JOiNER
WORK
189
panel
is usually more
sufficient than
to serve all purposes, not being labor finish, able and in an emergency. can or covered
frustrating
sea cock: lack of access can be downright for the sole because can be painted pieces. either bindings The plywood
dangerous
is an excellent flooring
be fitted in
with vinyl steel for
in one piece or laid in squares. for use with the vinyl coverings. will swell just it is practical It is not pretty, and enough to make to make
Do not make
the plywood In a sailboat coat of paint. In cabins is warm properly carpet, popular The
it will hold
a carpet and
will be used, the sole needs morning, not but it requires be used near should
with a vacuum
open
Indoor-outdoor
made of synthetic fibers with boatmen. It is light sole is the first of the
that will not absorb moisture, has become very enough to be taken up and cleaned on the dock. joinerwork to go in the hull. locations. In addition, and it must be it must be ade-
interior
Headliners
Headlining like homes pose, and hardboards vinyl - unheard of until people starred making than boats -- is a covering for the underside headlini *.g material is a vinyl fabric the insides of boats look more of deck beams and cabin tops. material made just for that purmaterials are plywood with
the best ones have an anti-mildew treatment. Other headliner having decorative finishes, acoustical tileboard, and light covering.
or Formica-type
Thermal
Insulation
Inexpensive, lightweight fiberglass insulation on the underside of decks and cabin tops adds to comfort both summer and winter and whether or not air conditioning is installed in the boat. The easiest kind to use is a type having a thin face of white plastic material on what is meant to be the down side, away from the deck above. It can be cut to fit between cent, though, deck beams and stapled in place. The only way to make it look deis to cover it over with headlining.
Icebox
The much about icebox, which looks so simple when used, is very time consuming boxes suit your and boat, difficult to
construct.
you will be
There are several makes on the market with a capacity of amounts to abont 50 pounds of ice. They are all plastic
190
INTERIOR
JOINER
WORK
~t5310td
A-A
<ECTION
-rkieu %7X
Figure 15-6.
ICE --
and have polyurethane if space chargers, refrigerators, When remember. preservative area allotted form. again permits, also made as electric generators, because Space building that
They but
are built I am
dnd
two of them
be placed
side-by-side
are of to
batteries,
and shore lines that are needed for even the service conditions can vary so widely. into a wooden that boat there be left between is always the outboard the hull and the box structure will be hidden in a boat, side should should and be shaped limited to make
an icebox should
or paint.
to the icebox,
The section in Figure 15-G is typical of the situation in many boats, and here plywood simplifies the job. Basically the box consists of an inner and outer shell, in between passage and of air, a watertight liner inside. it to the hull, making sure box first, leaving on bottom the top off, and brace
as noted above. Add posts in the corners and inand sides to support the inner shell and to take its
fastenings. Then coat the inside of the outer box with bitumastic paint and while it is still wet, line the box with tar felt paper laid with overlapping joints. This is a vapor barrier. The insulation the corner ~- I suggest posts and polyurethane the stiffeners. foam available in planks-is then cut Next make the inner plywood box. As for the drain, it must lead either overboard or, if the bottom of the box is below the waterline, to a sump tank. It is an invitation to rot to drain fresh water into the bilges of a wooden hull. The sump tank can be removable for dumping overboard or piped with a two-way valve to the bilge pump. Of course the drain should be at the low point of the bottom Before stead, with soidercd, to make of the box. the box top, joints smoothing easy. the liner is ideal, the corners must be fitted. The A liner plywood of stainless steel sheet inbe smooth watertight but the inner is tedious. can be fiberglassed making to fit between
INTERIOR
JOINER
WORK
191
because at sea.
less cold air is lost but the cold air will of the box to box and parti-
is unavoidable, Limit
the outside
I,$ U thickness,
the inside
wooden
on the insulation. light from gratings in the bottom, fit adjustable food
to separate
Woodwork to save time parts makes, made among as your boatbuilding up by a mail other things, boxes; order paneled project supply and nears completion, There doors; Inc., magazine, you can use in Caliand book and
house. louvered
is an outfit
line of dish,
rails and
binocular
and gratings
boat manufacturer
first class. The name of the firm is H & L Marine Street, Compton, California 90221.
Woodwork,
Chapter
16
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
There
seem
to be optional
ways, some
of them
good
and
some
bad,
for doing
everya to any
thing. Just remember seaworthy boat. The inspect coupled job. boats with opinions
that there is no compromise in quality reader is again urged to take advantage to study the details of the cxpcrienced. will soon reveal
of construction.
there are always by making patterns that backstay are fitting, light
a few items that are special. Here the and having a foundry pour the castings. special propeller for the sailboat, aprrturr floors when tanks there is the rudder casting,
usually
cast bronze
are located
bearing
for powerboats include prostruts fit properlyrudders, can be homemade, nf manganese from about inch. Above is important. too, bronze, 40,000 water, Some
and transom platform brackets. Some of the standard fittings but this does not always pay unless you have time to burn. Cast parts, and there especially for use underwater, different alloys. ranging are usually in tensile made are several
strength
pounds per square inch to upwards of 100,000 pounds per square aluminum alloy castings are sometimes used where saving weight of these alloys are not very resistant put out by some of the marine
192
finishes
paint
Anodizing
sprrre / w;4
PATTEW
FILLET-5
Figure
16-1.
protection for sand The kind lines molten shrinkage work ple with
fittings.
alloys peoAny
is Alcoa and
will be but briefly wilt know it is given is drawn than is made rather
metalworking
all about
for patterns
provided
on the wood,
Because
expected. Such
a two-foot
the layout
stores,
rule made
249,, . have fillets to provide at an angle in the castings sections to each have proportionately
fillets than thicker-walled a pattern-makers supply fillet into tool as shown, the corners, rubbed For a small
sections. (See Figure 16-1A.) Fillets may be purchased from house in wax strips, which are stuck in place with a heated be made and of leather wax. with smooth to smooth you should and fastened Knead a fillet rod. tool, in place which with glue. is simply pattern a slight This is a with paraffin the soft wax and work it Give the finished
or they may
or with a metal
it so it will not stick in the molding give the sides of the pattern the mold called by the molder. a molding
called draft, so it may be easily removed from understood by referring to B of Figure 16- 1. work, such as boat fittings, a small
For smali
p!atform
board
will
194
MISCEl,l~,~NEOL'S
LXI~AI%.S
Figure
16-2.
be usrd. and on it will be placed a box without ends to retain mold. The finished the drag, and togrther the assembly
mold consists of two boxes one upon the other, called the cope and is called a flask. Dowel pins on the cope fit into The pattern is placed in the drag that when packed hard it will stick together: the two surfaces will part. metal, and some small is removed from
sockets on the drag and keep the two in alignment. and covered with sand of such a nature the drag is then turnrd
over. With the pattern still in the mold, the surface of the sand
Then the rope is added, tilled with sand, and rammed solid. The cope is lifted off and turned over, and the sprite, a passage for pouring the molten the drag, leaving A flat pattern unless the pattern cope is replaced The molding with a complicated a space to be filled with metal. as shown in Figure shape, is more 16-1 is easy to remove, difficult but a deeper one, or one breaking the sand to take uut without vent holes to carry off gases arc cut with molders tools. The pattern
The casting is ready to be poured when the casting by the foundry. 16-1B is easy, but a block pattern in Figure
study of the mold shown in Figure 16-2 will indicate that to produce a casting shaped like the pattern, the pattern would have to be split along the centerline. Further. if the cpsting is to have a hollow portion, is made by ramming the hollow area must be kept free of molten metal; box until full and then baking the sand to this is done with a core of sand shaped like the desired hollow. A simple core as shown sand into an open-top
MISCEI-L.A.VECLS !?ET.d!LS make regular tended it hard and strong beyond the length enough to withstand the pouring of the lead.
!95
shape are molded in a split box with dowel pins. In the pattern, of the casting so the imprint
mold will support the core. This is shown in the figure. The core print, as it is called, is painted black so the molder will understand the core. When the casting has cooled and been taken from the mold, the core is easily broken out.
Ballast The
Keel keel casting for sailboats will be of cast iron or lead and will be bolted
ballast
either through the keel or through both the keel and floors, as preferred by the architect. Bolts will be shown on the plans and are the largest -diameter fastenings used in the construction consisting of the boat. They are made of rods threaded on both ends for nuts, bronze or Everdur iron or Monei bolts and on the inside of the boat are set up on heavy washers under which are grommets of a few turns of cotton wicking soaked in red lead. Tobin wrought bolts are used to hold lead keels, while good galvanized are used when the keel is cast iron. Because designer made shrinkage of the weight of the metals --~ 450 pounds per cubic of the ballast and just as carefully rule. Shrinkage reproduced by the builder. foot for cast iron and figured by the for the keel are is made with a 710 for lead -~ the size and location must be carefully Templates the keel pattern is VH per foot.
from the mold loft lines and, as noted earlier, of lead and iron castings
The boatbuilder can make the pattern for a cast iron ballast keel. but the casting must be done by an iron foundry becauve of the high temperatures required. On the other hand, for a lead keel, the amateur or professional boatbuilder can make the mold clrttl pour the casting.
Keel the pattern is made of soft pine, and for a rectangular be constantly checked for accuracy keel as the Those
16-t3A) the job is quite simple. For a more shapely keel the pattern nears the finished shape. The pattern
entails more
pine anywhere from 1 to 2 thick that are screw fastened and glued together. with model building can see that the bread and butter through tion may be used here by drawing waterlines
of wood used, and sawing each layer roughly to shape bcforc an iron keel are cored, in diameter
and care must be taken to locate into account. lhe to take the nut, allowing enough
depth to cement over the nut to close the hole in the casting. A core box is made only for the longest core needed, as the molder can break cores off to proper length for the shorter ones. When required, a centerboard slot is also cored. The iron casting should, if possible, be given a coat or two of red lead before it starts
(,A
~1
196
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
LEAF
l-H 4 c2A-r mbn5rEE
&EL
3._
-SE',-:?I,b b
---TU6
Figure 16-3. AH irm kvcl must h sand-cast in aloundry, cnn hc ccrst I)) N mold nt /kc Suilding site. to rust. L.atrr on it can be finished smooth.
and sanding it
Lead
lead keel and let the foundry make the mold and pour
the casting. Making the pattern is a relatively easy job as compared to making the sand mold at the boat shop. One firm named Keel Makers solicits this business, either for one-off or production castings. Keel Makers can be contacted at 101 New Bern Street,
MISCELLANEOUS Charlotte, 11746. Accuracy 0.26 North Carolina 28203, or at 43 Old Brook when making Road,
DETAILS
197
Of course,
that will do the job you are in luck. patterns As a comparison, to make (Figure cast iron weighs about 16-3B), as it can be that
is particularly inch.
cubic inch of lead weighs about 0.41 pound. pound per cubic A rectangular necessary.
It must be remembered
the mold be strong so that it will not break apart when the lead is poured and that the mold be supported dry before starting, may be burned. Making the mold for a shaped lead keel (Figure reason to have the keel sand-cast in a foundry. 16-3C) is quite a task and is a good As shown in the section, forms are by husky braces and shores. as the lead will spatter The inside of the mold is given a thin coat of plaster to prevent it from burning. The plaster and the mold must be perfectly if poured into a wet mold and workmen
made to the outside of the keel, plus the thickness of the mold, at stations and half stations. They are then set up rigidly (Figure 16-3D) and the mold is strip-built inside of the forms. As the strips are fitted they are edge nailed to each other and to the forms. The inside is finished to a set of templates representing the finished keel plus an allowance for shrinkage. Gouges and round-bottomed planes are used for this work. The casting will reflect Lead, fortunately, iron melting the degree of smoothness point, by bricks so a roaring of your mold. wood or charcoal fire can be built has a low melting but at the least, you will need a large
pot, supported
under it, and several ;ron ladles. Better still is a melting pot with a pouring spigot or pipe leading over the mold and a metal trough to distribute the molten metal over the length of the keel. The top of the open mold must be level. A centerboard taken care of by a plank of proper thickness must be on hand to allow for discrepancies, mold before pouring. to act as a core. because slot can be More than enough lead the pouring must be car-
ried on to completion before the top of the lead already in the mold starts to solidify. Start to pour when the lead in the pot is hot, distribute it in the mold, skim the slag from the top, and puddle the molten lead to prevent the formation of air pockets. Add pigs to the pot as you pour, and they will quickly melt in the hot lead if the fire is kept blazing. Allow at least a day for the casting to cool before removing the mold. The top surface of the lead casting can be smoothed with a woodworking wood auger hand plane. The holes for the keel bolts are drilled with a barefoot or with a twist drill
lengthened by welding a rod to the end, preferably used in an electric drill of ample capacity. Eirhk r drill must be frequently withdrawn to clear the lead shavings, and kerosene is used as a lubricant. Where necessary, the outside of the keel is smoothed with coats of trowel cement, and the cement is then sanded. The keel casting is liberally coated with thick white or red lead where it fits against keel and deadwood.
Standing
Rigging
Chainplates they are kept straight and prevented The mast loads are transmitted to the
Unless masts are designed to be free-standing, from breaking by wire rope standing rigging.
198
MISCEI.I.ANEOlJS
and details
equal
of fastenings.
It is a simple matter
the strength of the metal parts, but their fastenings of the shroud. Sometimes However, the chainplates are bolted
The area of the wood in the hull against which the bolts and are located either on the outside of the plankit is better to bolt them to backing the clamp. frames (See Figure 16-4A.) which with fastenings,
ing or between the planking and a frame. blocks between Blocks of this type eliminate weakens the hull somewhat Inside chainplates let flush into the planking,
that are cut to bear against the necessity at that point. of cutting
and the metal may bleed and discolor the topside paint. due to corrosion, to various
steel for both plates and bolts, because types of small boat chainplates
2s
It
bronze,
Monel.
torn out under stress. This may result in a broken mast. There peculiar classes,
detail on the plans for the boats. Referring to chainplates in general, the end of the lug extending above deck should have only slightly rounded edges so as not to reduce strength unnecessarily. To stop leaks, the hole through collar the deck should be filled with length upwards of 28 fret compound or fitted with a metal set in compound. type with a waterline
Sailing yachts of the more expensive are fitted with a rectangular bronze which lugs for the shroud turnbuckles trnding keel. This sheerline notched arrangement. of old wooden
plate between the frames and the planking to are bolted or riveted. Diagonal metal straps ex16-4B, distributes rather than the rigging loads over a often noticed in the is carefully the frames
to the keel are riveted to the plate and screwed to each frame crossed and the shown in Figure boats. of the hull. called hogging,
Wooden
Spars sailboats have spars that are hollow, and there has been a definite alloy extrusions. There are several manufacturers in the boat. trend of
spars that make them up ready for installation used for hollow spars. made of mast-grade spars are preferably
Despite this, it is a
light, strong wood. Clear fir and pine run rather far behind as second choice. Inasmuch as a mast is a column, the maximum sectional area is required at midlength of the longest unsupported panel, so to further save weight aloft, the mast is tapered from the point of greatest cross-sectional area to the head and sometimes to the heel as well. The edges on which sails are set, the top of the boom and the aft side of the mast, are made straight so the sails will set as they should. When using modern waterproof glue, fastenings in spars are not required or even desirable, as they add weight up high where it is detrimental to the stability of the
?ET41-
RAtiGc;Lcs
I~I hl&T j+J $\LN ~ --=Y i ,, ------=i=i= 1,1 ,,lPA .+7. 1,+ __ : , - _ A&z f-i--, /*- __ji& 6 w .8_1
-_,_-_-_I--
ATE5
0
I;igu rc 164. hoat. As a matter glue was known. varnish to protect long lengths, scarphed fitting
53R
h;?lCf=%??$;,;-;i$.IC5E
of fact, hollow glued spars were in use years before truly watrrproof water-resistant the joints casein glue being relied upon together Sitka spruce, is required. fortunately. of amateur-built When joining with coats of is available in from moisture.
boats will have spars that fall within the individual pieces are 10 times the thickness of to make a perfectly is as strong or
on the flat, the length of the joint being made about of this type. Theoretically
a glued joint
200
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
+-/so
GLUEC S-A~PH MA-X-
&fj~@!!!Jz?$kQ
L.&x OR 0CWt-4 SECT!,?klS I soL~ca=2 O.A.d AST
T;:
@J
Horn
Qe,cdTgw,GH;pEm
5%7A-i ~~O!vlS
B2A-r
-Qd-
9ECE Ci-EP
Q-l=?i%?
ROUT-R 5,+ii
5!+R-3
Figure
as a glued joint will be locally stiffer than the adjoining unjointed pieces, it is best to stagger the scarphs as much as possible. Figure 16-5 shows a scarph and typical hollow spar sections forta.antl-aft in use today. mast IO make is a hollow, rectangular rabhetrd. is prcfcrrcd box spar. This section, with the pircrs by some builders because it is easier to conThe simplest
1101 skidding of the glued surtaces. The section next in simplicity is the round spar made of hollowed-out halves. The larger spars, both the oval section and ,he round srction made of staves, are the most difficult to make and would be quite a job for the amateur. Of the two, the oval is the easier in the smaller sizes, as it consists of two round halves and two tapered side pieces. The wall thickness of oval and round spars is always tapered in the interest of weight saving. classes use a solid mast with a groove routed out for the This groove can be made by first making a saw cut Some of the sailboat
with a circular saw and then routing out the groove in the saw cut, using a very highspetbd cutter with a shank narrower than the saw cut. (Sue Figure 16-5.) To make a boltrope lhc tangular groove in a hollow spar made up of two rounded routed on each half before the sections sailboats. which T-boom booms. is used on smaller halves, the groove is hand are glued together. have solid recgouged or machine
also sometimes
Rectangular
Spars to make a box spar. unless he has extensive dressed four sides to the dimensions to add a slight thickness, say With such material with the architects at the for at hand detail &,
the easiest way for an amateur tools, is to order the spar material section of the spar.
maximum
It is desirable
dressing up and finishing there is nothing spar, fairing the lines. The
to do but taper
plans. This is done by laying off the width at the spacing the shape with a long batten, width layout for the forward
MISCELLANEOUS because joint both edges are shaped. surface Duplicate contact sides may be temporarily be made. a makeshift 16-6A.)
DETAILS
201
nailed together
When only one or two spars are to be made, by nailing a series of short boards horizontally ground to support the outer ends. (See Figure at the same height, or the top edges shimmed side of the spar that is to be straight, the boom. Shellac pieces
to a wall or fence,
that is, the aft side of the mast or the top side of that will be glued.
the inside of spars, taking care not to coat the surfaces gauge to scribe between the lines. The filler
the width of the side pieces on the forward and aft pieces at the ends of the spar and is also omitted in way of and shellac
these. Because solid filler blocks have been known to swell and either split the spar or cause poorly glued joints to open up, some prefer the pad-type fillers glued to the inside before assembly as shown in sketch B, Figure 16-6. A long solid filler fitted at the heel of the mast is bound to locally stiffen the mast due to the sudden increase in sectional area. The late Phil Rhodes, one of the great yacht designers, insisted upon a block cut as shown in Figure 16-6C to avoid this situation and also advised running saw cuts longitudinally on the block to allow for expansion. Provide drain holes in all solid fillers cxcrpt the one at the masthead, so moisture will not collect and start rot. When everything paying partirular is ready. mix the glue strictly to those regarding spread it quickly in accordance and thoroughly. with the instructions, Before gluing make as there attention temperature and working life after mix-
ing. Once the glue is mixed, sure there are enough clamps
at hand: it is surprising
should bc one every few inches or so to apply the pressure required for the glue, particularly resorcinol. Although Figure 16-6a shows a boom that is larger than any that the average amateur would attempt. it is a good illustratiorr of the number of clamps used bv a builder to ensure a perfect job. Ail kinds of clamps may be utilized if their openings clamp joined 16-6D.) The clamps should not be removed for at least 24 hours to allow the glue to develop full strength. corners, paper. finished coats. Finish the spar by scraping finish is wanted the excess glue from the seams, gradually working has a beautiful round the when and then sand all sides smooth, If a varnish down to fine abrasive appearance insufficient, are sufficiently wide to clamp the spar plus pieces of scrap used under the If the number of your clamps is sketch, Figure spar clamps of two husky pieces of oak or ash 92 n diameter. (Set pads to distribute together pressure and prevent scars.
Sitka spruce
Hollow though
Spars may have a rectangular mast and boom, halves around the spinnaker a centerline. pole First,
a boat
made in symmetrical
202
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
Figure
get out two pieces of stock that will be square when clamped diameter material; of the pole in the middle. Figure 16-6E, Mark centerlines
on the mating
then lay out the inside of the pole, that is. the part to be hollowed. control
hollowing templates,
for points every two feet or so apart and constantly the wall thickness of
the finished spar and guard against ending up with walls that are too thin or not uniform in thickness. The hollow portion is ended in a quick taper, as shown on the sketch, so that pole end fittings will be attached assembly is tapered. to solid wood. all When the halves have been glued together, and then the square the spar must be laid out on the outside,
along the spars centerline. The next step is to cut the corners off the square and make it eight-sided. This is done by drawing guide lines as done in Figure 16-6F. The following description is an example of how the guide lines might be laid out. At any point along the length of the tapered assembly, the end of a rule is placed even with one cor-
ner, and the rule is pivoted until the 12 mark lines up with the opposite corner. Points are made on the wood at the 3t$$ 0 and 8rh H marks on the rule. This is repeated at every foot and a batten is run through the points to draw a line. These figures should of the spar, because for ease of layout, the he varied to suit differences in the diameter
rule should be almost square across the spar. The ratio of 12-814-3% can be reduced or enlarged to suit any size of spar. For smaller spars of, say, 5 d diameter, the figures can be halved. Therefore, the end of the rule is held on one corner of the spar, and the 6 mark on the other, with points made at the 1% Nand 4 !LaII marks. When guide lines have been drawn on all four sides, it is a simple matter to make the spar eight-sided with a drawknife and plane and to then round it off to be finished by sanding.
I
-----_____ I --------____ ----------
Y-7
FVLE I
PVR ub.l~~~PhI WALL THIC~A?SS USe: A TEMPLICITiZ WCRY -l-WC feey OR so vd-E*i ROUhD SCCTICUS HOLLONJIW ,
SPIt4kJAdiR
Ou~WR4lGHT~Td~.
Sl-RhlOHT
SIIXD
1
LdE5 MA-We\ SICSC, XAWicl 0t.l AL -V CUT rwh ROUND -!-AWLCC I,- e @MT-
LL *T k!EcJwIM-
Figure
16-6.
Sbar-mak,rzg
drfails.
204
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS sail will be straight on the aft side but the method of
Rigging
Atmchnents
for Wooden
Spars
Not too many years ago almost all masts were round and the upper ends of the standing rigging location the marconi manufacturers struction. logical therefore were spliced in a loop, dropped down over the masthead to the desired of of a and held in position by shoulder cleats on the mast. With the introduction a rope consisting
single wire core with eighteen It has more strength not suitable rigging
wires twisted around it. This is known as 1 to 19 conthan any other rope of the same diameter It is very stiff and difficult a mast, particularly spliced rigging and is the to splice and is disappeared which are
oval or rectangular
has practically
and the ends of the wire rope are fitted with swaged stainless steel terminals,
attached to the mast by means of tangs. Most tangs are made of strong sheet metal, like Everdur, Monel, or stainless steel, and are held to the mast by one bdt and a number of wood screws calculated to take the outward and downward stress components of the stay. It is the job of the naval architect light and strong, and each tang is usually carefully to design tangs that arc both for the job to be done.
detailed
The tangs can be made by a machine shop or a rigging specialist, or the enterprising amateur can tackle the sheet metal work by fitting his bandsaw with a metal cutting blade. Besides making the tangs exactly according to plan, the builder must drill the holes for the tang fastenings with care. Loose holes will permit the tangs to slip, possibly overloading a few of the fastenings instead of letting all of the fastenings do their share of the job. and mizzen masts Figure 16-7 shows tangs for double These particular tangs lower shrouds on the main simple, and well the mast with clips for the of a ketch. are strong,
made, with tube bolts used to save weight. Straps encircling heels of the spreaders Fore-and-aft
bolts for tangs have nuts on the aft side of the mast that would interthat has been glued to the mast and cut away for desirable on booms to prevent sail slides from points of extra strain, of the mainsail such
fere with the sail track if it were laid directly on the masts aft face. To get around this, the sail track can be laid on a batten the nuts. Battens through the batten as at the extreme through-fastenings are also sometimes binding due to contact
with the boom at their edges. The screws for the sail track go headboard,
and imo the wall of the spar. At certain ends of a track and at reefed positions rather than screws should be used.
Mast Step The compressive load from the mast is taken by the mast step, which is of some hardthe load
wood like oak. The step is given a length of several frame spaces to distribute
over the hull, and in boats of any size it is placed in notches in the floors after first having been notched itself. When carefully done, the resulting joint at each floor will pre-
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
205
Figure
16-7.
and in addition,
it is drift bolted to the and rot the step. A there are other
in the step to take the mast tenon should have a but like many other boat details,
hole drilled
types of steps, particularly in small craft, and details will be found on the plans. Masts are sometimes stepped on deck or on the cabin roof. The thrust load is then carried ample down to the hull by a stanchion strength. or by strategically located joiner bulkheads of
Aluminum
Alloy
Spars
The plans for the boat you are building will probably call out the specifications for the parts if the spars are to be made of aluminum alloy. There is now a large choice of sizes of extruded sections for masts, booms, spinnaker poles, and the like. and also a large choice of fittings to complete the rig and make it work. Sailboat rigging is a business of its own and is best left to the experts if you do not have the details of what you need. There are ads in the sailing magazines Marine, for many spar suppliers and sailmakers to use aluminum Street, Guilford. Connecticut ready to 06437; help with your problems known firms are Kenyon if you have decided spars. Among the best-
New Whitfield
206
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
Sailmakers,
The forces from the thrust of the mast and the upward pull of the rigging tend to collapse the hull, so that in moderate-size step and mast partner boats it is well to fit a tie rod between the mast 16.4B. The rod is threaded on both ends for them, as shown in Figure
nuts which are set up over washers. Just take up the nuts snugly when installing as there is no need to try to putt the deck and step together.
Types
of Rudders consists rudders, of a wood or metal it is attached blade and a stock through which force is
Except
for common
types of
The location
or it is hung outboard
Further,
Powerboat Modern
Rudders powerboat rudders are now almost invariably The made of metal, although type has a
formerly they were often of wood. They are sometimes into a split stock through blade of cast manganese which the blade is riveted.
of galvanized
most common
bronze bossed for a rolled bronze or None1 stock that is inThis is a more durable blade than a steel one. Figure
DETAILS
207
?>,
I I i
0 A
Figure
16-9.
at the top by the rudder port, a stuffing box in Figure 16-9B and is made in liable to catch
to prevent leaks where the stock enters the hull, and at the bottom by a pintle riding in rudder is sketched but is not supported by cutting at the bottom and is more
lobster pot buoys and the like. It is a clean design and results from an effort to reduce resistance away the deadwood, steering of sizes. so there is no way of supporting rudder is used behind The two types of rudders of the rudder. On twin screw boats a spade-type qualities. in 4 number
may be purchased
Small
Sailboat
Rudders sailboats have an outboard rudder as shown in Figure 16-10A. upon available material, warping, The and
Small centerboard
blade may be of one or more pieces, depending case it should be doweled with galvanized the grain direction reason. dicated The blade area below the surface
but in any
from piece to piece for the same in shape, as inbeing about 25 peris used, the rudder
on the sections in the sketch, with the maximum and pintles as seen in any marine disengaged
cent of the blade width aft of the leading edge of the rudder. ety of gudgeons hardware may float up and become
from the boat, leaving the skipper with a tiller in this, the rudder may be weighted with
an insert of lead heavy enough to offset the buoyancy of the blade, or the upper pintle can be drilled for a cotter pin just below the gudgeon. The tiller is fixed, or preferably made to hinge so it can be raised when tacking. In shoal water localities the small boat outboard rudder is often made with a
208
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
,,---
TZALL OAROE(L
au
7lLLClC FlrnuG
5LllJlhll3 FITTINGS
Figure
and fittings.
pivoting blade so that it may be raised to clear obstructions. (See Figure 16.10B.) This is done by pivoting the blade between long cheek pieces riveted securely to a filler of the same thickness buoyancy while sailing as the blade. A lead insert is needed to prevent it from rising due to of the boat. A light line is used to raise the rudder or the forward motion over shoal areas.
Some of the standard fittings available from marine stores are sketched in Figure 16- 1OC. Besides these, several of the marine hardware manufacturers make sets of fittings for small outboard rudders that prevent the rudder from coming off, yet leave the rudder readily removable from the transom. Rudder fittings should be bolted rather than screwed to the transom.
Large
Sailboat
Rudders shows the rudder for a keel sailboat in which the stock is run down far from pressure of water against and and
shown at the end of the stock to prevent it from bending the blade gudgeon are fitted for support.
is turned. At the bottom of the rudder a pintle Unfortunately, the variety of rudder shapes
thicknesses is so great that stock fittings are not available and patterns must be made for castings. These fittings are usually detailed by the architect with enough dimensions so that, nonferrous tough, together metals with templates fittings. made on the hull and rudder, It is inadvisable One of the best materials shafting, the necessary patto use anything but for rudder stocks is pounds per terns can be turned out for the use of the foundry. for rudder strong Tobin bronze or Everdur
while the cast parts should be of a of not less than 60,000 because the rudder is important.
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
209
EC
Figure Larger indicated 16-11. rudders mus! be made of pieces that are doweled or drift bolted together in diameter near the trailing by the fastenings. bc joined together, their coming as
RuDDEP AL/V -
Foe
IL4AW
by the plans. The size of dowels and bolts should be shown by the designer edge, where the blade is thinner, Dowel holes must be parallel and all fastenings to must be kept in and when and then a to make a
so the wood will not be weakened or the pieces cannot of the blade to prevent
through
Drift bolts used in heavier rudders do nut have to be parallel driven at varying angles, piece of wood is inserted how the blade is tapered. If the builder tapering alternated they lock the pieces together. to fill the slot. The enlarged edge have a slot cut far enough
It may be seen that the amount of work required enough piece to have a thickness planer,
rudder should not be underestimated. is fortunate each some hand labor can edge. Otherwise all be saved by planing in adjacent to its thickness at the forward warping,
The sketch also shows how the grain is and how the after edge onto the rudder
is hollowed out so water will flow past the deadwood of disturbance. about in Chapter
1/? thick for protection from worms and to eliminate which is practically impossible without unshipping the rudder. The is carried around the sides by an inch or so and secured with copper tacks. edge of the rudder blade begins aft of the center of the stock so that the
with copper
The forward
rudder can be turned hard over without fouling the sternpost. With the rudder arranged as shown in Figure 16-11 A, water is kept out of the hull by screwing a threaded brass or bronze pipe into a hole drilled in the horn timber. The hole must be just the right amount smaller than the pipe so the threads will take hold, and it must be drilled at the correct angle. The best way to start the hole is to cut through a block (shown dotted in the figure) having its face at right angles fcJ the center of the stock. This can be laid out from your mold loft drawings and a drilling that the hole is drilled at the proper angle. guide can be devised to ensure
210
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
TL?AILiNG
ECGE
SHEATHING --
l-E
,=?I?.\ m.
\l
PL
ATE
AFT
!=L?R
CPA\\ ---.IUEf ._.. ----
hiJLC
-.
Fi,gure
16-12.
Rudders
for Auxiliary
Sailboats and the shaft is on the centerline, there must can turn
be a hole or aperture
can be checked on the mold loft floor by setting up a semicircular as the propeller centerline, on the centerline of the rudder.
The aper-
ture is cut away by trial until the rudder can bc swung 40 degrees off center and still clear the propeller blades. (See sketch, Figure 16-12.) It is not sufficient to end the rudder stock at the top of the aperture: it must either partly surround the opening as shown in Figure 16-11B. or completely encircle it as shown in Figure complete machining long pattern 16.1lC. Sometimes the casting to finish the latter method is carried to make, out by casting and quite the stock in one piece from upper end to the pintle is needed, is required is not the easiest A shorter the job. casting below the aperture, around but a a lot of as
the aperture,
shown, is hard to beat for strength, and except for filing rough spots from the casting, the only machinin, = needed is to taper, bore, and keyway the upper end for the stock, drill holes in the blade straps, and turn a pintle or b arc for an inserted pintle on the lower end. The blade straps shown are cut from flat bronze and secured with counter-
! /fl b >; :
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
211
Figure
sunk rivets. The stock, of course, is made from bronze shafting, match the apertuie casting,
and is secured with a pinned nut on the lower end. A ruda cleep hole by ;akto box is shown on the fittings be and the stock and lifting A stuffing the rurder enough
der made like this may be removed from the hull without digging ing off the two-piece disengage adapted, steerer. the bottom horn timber. split gudgeon pintle from the heel gudgeon.
due to the angle between stock and horn timber. tiller fitting,
of any rudder has a keyway for a standard manufacturers. An expensive and by no means necessary the trailing Thk sheathing edge as illustrated by templating is made the shape
There are several varieties of each of these items made by the marine hardware refinement to a rudder is to bronze sheath Figure 16-13. bandsawing the edge and
in Figure 16-12B
of the trailing
from a sheet of bronze about &, V to X2 Minch thick. and there is much waste. and laid on the rudder to mark a rabwiil be flush with the surface of the blade. Fastening and the trailing the rudder I;harp. Sometimes is of countersunk head rivets as shown, edges are brazed on a new boat will
by means together,
then ground
reasonably
vibrate so that it chatters considerably, a condition remedied by sharpening the trailing edge somewhat, but the sheathed rudder is perfect from the start and is usually fitted on cruisers and racers of the finest quality.
Steering There
212
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS methods must be used. Some sailboats attached to the upper fastened and securely have an Edson-type stock. Other
more complicated
with the wheel and gearing gears must be carefully have the wheel farther over sheaves. 02745,
aligned
on the rudder stock with a length of sprocket and chain and wire The Edson Corp., 471 Industrial Park Road, New Bedis one of the worlds largest producers of sailboat steerers a design handbook. from a pedestal A recent Edson innovation conin lieu of cable-over-pulley
nections to the rudder tiller. This greatly simplifies the installation. There are several types of steerers for powerboats. One method gear steerer steerer. at the wheel a.nd chain use a gearbox sizes of boats, and wire rope similar Others at the wheel or elsewhere
to the sailboat
the rudder arm with shafts, solid or pipe. A more modern small to medium pull cable from the rack to an arm at the rudder.
uses a rack and pinion at the wheel and a heavy pushThis is by far the simplest type of
steerer and is seen in many boats because it is the least expensive to install. The fortunate builder has good detail of the steering system on his plans: otherwise he has been left on his own to work it out. The steering much of the interior gear parts be securely wire rope nonferrous sheaves. whenever joinerwork fastened latter The has been built. should to prevent movement should be installed before too It is most important that all steering be carefully
be through-bolted
aligned to reduce friction and eliminate possible. manual Due to the high cost of labor, dard with the stock powerboat
wear on the wire rope. All parts should aiso be hydraulic steering has almost become cylinder, stan-
manufacturers.
wheel, a hydraulic
all connected by three tubes or hoses of small diameter. There cpn be two or more steering stations-it makes little difference as long as there are no leaks in the piping-so the more the number of stations of design, the more advantageous the system. One drawback, and this is a matter by introducing Florida 33559. is the great zumber of steering wheel turns In the larger boats, the number of turns pump instead of a manually steering components operated Inc., is Hynautic,
from hard over to hard over of the rudder. can be reduced Box 668, one. One of the largest suppliers Osprey,
a power-driven of hydraulic
Fuel Tanks Due to the danger of explosion and fire, the construction particularly struction Guard. gasoline tanks, should not be taken lightly. are well covered by standards with long experience, 17 and Recommended specify the all-important The standards and installation of fuel tanks, and conCoast
Boat and Yacht Council, by the U.S. with them, so heed them Monel Alloy 400
of tank materials.
MISCELLANEOUS remains for probably the finest metal from which to make tanks, but must not have of fuel tanks. a coating either
213 or A
high in cost. Steel remains the most inexpensive of this book is the approval of certain
material alloys of
5083, or 5086. When buying a fuel tank, be sure it bears the label of the manufacturer by the standards nection One caution be galvanically and that it shows it was tested. system of the boat. tanks concerns the connection about aluminum compatible to the bonding
Also, be sure that it has a tab for conof metal fittings, such is to the
as metal tubing and metal ends of fuel hoses, to the tank, because with the aluminum pipe coupling threads weld half of an aluminum size of the opening;
to the tank and then screw a stainless steel that is a size or two of hose, and these
of the coupling
you must start out with a coupling to the tank are normally unthreaded to aluminum including
larger than usual. Fill and vent connections can be slipped over and clamped All valves in the fuel piping, engine (and fuel return And one final anywhere except word: which do not leak at the stems. openings
those at the tank for the fuel suction to the must be of the approved for any purpose
in the tank
A tank manufacturer that has made hundreds of aluminum alloy fuel tanks for stock and custom boatbuilders as well as for the one-off people is Florida Marine Tanks, Inc., 16480 N. W. 48th Avenue, Hialeah, Florida 33014.
Tank Figure
Capacity
capacity
the volume in cubic inches and dividing by 231 to find contents seem to always work the capacities is multiplied from inch dimensions.
The cylindrical and rectangular tanks A and B are straightforward to figure. Shape C is typical of a tank installed under the cockpit of a sailboat. The sides are parallel but the top and bottom Shape D is often are not, due to hull shape. The cross-sectional under the floor of a cabin, area W times H of the tank. the and again is the average of the area of the ends, or the same as the area at midlength used for tanks located of the ends.
volume is the length times the average of the area of the ends. The W measurements are taken at midheight
Propeller Propeller
Shafts
and
TAti<
CApAC17-y
I
1b-i (J-s(DlMEdSlo~5
fibLL0Fd.S
Id INCH&)
A 0
e Q
/ ;.
6 ALJ. =
L%3.\4SCKlZ
231
CiALS_
LXH%W 231 -
0 0
Figure
16-l<.
MISCELLANEOUS just about priced themselves content, bronze, ing materials, metal, Council tioned and this is probably afford them. A somewhat a used Tobin shaft) out of the pleasure boat market. standard by various These
DETAILS
215
unlike governments,
17, 18, and 22. If the shaft is going to be turning boat use, then Aquamet Aquamet diameter, 17 is a strong, suitable choice. and Yacht menBoat 22 is a better American
yacht service
If your boat plans do not specify the shaft P-6 has charts for selecting spacing. above and also for bearing while the outboard
Typical
to the engine,
must be carefully
for this work. Dimensions for machining the shaft end and propeller hub have long been standardized, at least in the U.S., and the SAE data for this is usually tabulated and illustrated in the catalogs of the propeller makers. When setting up the length of your shaft, allow one shaft diameters clearance between the propeller hub and the strut. Figure motorboat. batten shaft around 16-15A shows a longitudinal section at the shaft centerline arrangement of a twin screw with a keel The same section applies to a common to prevent single screw motorboat water from leaking additional
and cutaway skeg. It shows the usual modern log with a stuffing box inboard
of a rubber-necked into the boat struts Intermediate support. by a short due to vibration
the shaft, and a strut to support the shaft at the propeller. long to require The
are used when the shaft is sufficiently length minor proven of rubber hose secured
The stuffing box and the shaft log are both of bronze and are connected by clamps. hose helps to reduce misalignment of the shaft. Shaft logs are made in the several of boats,
with a wedge of wood in your boat to get the correct alignment. The base flange of the shaft log must be made watertight by bedding the flange with a generous amount of bedding Wherever otherwise *a The because therefore compound, possible, such as Dolfinite, or with one of the thiokol-base with silicon with polyester be used. or epoxy resin, in place and is indeed. later with the shaft materials. bolts; the base should be through-fastened the wood should be treated to clean and paint This precaution bronze
wood screws of the same metal should the hole is difficult susreptible
to worm damage.
is very important
for the shaft hole and is cut off flush with the outside of the hull. This type of shaft log is rather special and is not used as frequently as the kind that terminates at the base. Another type of special shaft log is sometimes used in moderate to large size boats where the shaft is quite long in proportion bearing between the first intermediate to the diameter and it is desirable to have a s shaft strut and the engine. The bearing In this case shaft
/n
<TTCPu BEAClUG
* 7 CVTLE-X
CACTtUG PeneuG
t----t-Y
,?-. -1 I 1-k\ 5-e..--&&E iP.4 $, ,EE <Y-e. 7 I)& \ \ II/ICC \\ I/ ..E7 \ ,\ J/ cr,,m -1.
TYPE
OF
LdL,3 -
TE:r
JL
Y~-\FT .---.I
,+..-..
SECT COTIE
l?Z.3 -
F - u~.
ZC
.--AFT
Figure
16-15.
MISCELLANEOLS ward end is not exposed cooling water tapped to a flow of water; water lubrication of the bearing. The
DETAILS
217
is provided
by engine
water used is part of is not detrimenThis type of shaft log item is the propeller to find a that
tal, because only a small amount is sent to the shaft log bearing. is specially made up and not found in marine supply catalogs. A part of the propulsion setup that is almost always a special shaft strut. As specified
by the plans, these are either the single amI or the v type, and are, however, enough some adjustable dimensions struts on the market
due to the angle of the shaft and the shape of the hull it is nearly impossible stock strut that will fit. There might just do the job. 16-15A umbian struts, or a mock-up Bronze pair to fit the boat. Otherwise, on a sketch
as shown in Figure
must be sent to a strut manufacturer I am not advertising Freeport, patterns New York 11520
so he can make up one or a but over the years Colthousands of special alterations.
Corp.,
with moderate
Most struts are made of cast manganese Struts are fastened or manganese should These through the planking
bronze bolts. The heads of the bolts should be oval and countersunk slot to keep the bolt from turning from the strut manufacturer, specifying
have a screwdriver
needed. You might as well have the strut maker install the bearing beat the Goodrich of bearing Cutless-type bearing, shell of bronze or, if the hull is aluminum, has grooves that channel and sand, thus minimizing the strut and secured diameter to an optional
plastic-type
and for washing out silt is lightly pressed into are four times the shaft to can be cut to make two
with one or two set screws. The bearings struts, so that one standard bearing
intermediate ones. Figure 16-15A also shows a typical arrangement boat goes through outside. casting The latter for bearing the deadwood. lubrication. The stuffing bearing The stuffing has a Cutless-type
box is inside the hull, the stern bearing and a water scoop on each side of the box can be had rubber Both stuffing necked, with a box assembly and
piece of hose between the stuffing box and the casting. the stern bearing Water hull through joints are stock items of marine in the deadwood hardware
will fill the hole for the shaft and must be prevented structure.
the stuffing box and stern bearing castings, either a lead sleeve as shown in A of the figure (the lead is easily flanged by hammering) or a bronze tube special ordered from a supplier bolts. The like Columbiar. pipe. Bronze. The pilots of the castings should be fastened waxed leaking. can be tapped for the ends of a threaded stuffing box The castings to the wood with hanger braided rings, flax or Teflon-
packing braid,
either
impregnated
asbestos
as individual
LEFT
$?IGHT A$-+-EC?t.l
r(4~D
Fbgure
16-16.
of Propeller
Rotation either right-hand requires rotation or left-hand. a r$ht-hand Looking propeller forward from in
propellers
are made
takes a left-hand
propeller.
It is customary
as shown in Figure
Aligning
Propeller
Shaft Couplings between vibration the engine and propeller shaft couplings there will first and the stern of a feeler
If there is misalignment not only be unnecessary to the rear bearing the engine mated
and seal of the reverse gear. The shaft should be installed to it. If there are only two support and a rubber-necked between the coupling
shaft log, block up the shaft inboard at the rubber halves by inserting
as shown in Figure 16.17. You can tell by gently pulling on the strips whether the pressure, and thus the gap, is the same for all pieces. Hardwood and thin brass shims are used under the engine mounts until the alignment is as perfect as possible. The final test is to tighten down the engine and still have good alignment of the couplings.
Many engines are equipped with adjustable mounts that need but a wrench to lift or lower them a few thousands of an inch, and some of the larger engines have jacking screws built into the mounts for the same purpose. If aligning of the engine is done with the boat out of water, it must be tested again
MI.~CEi~l.ANEOC~.S DE?,-IILS
219
when the vessel is launched throwing Pulley out the alignment Drives is often
because
some
hulls change
shape
when water-borne,
lhc boatbuilder
out a v-belt
lhe fortnulitt~ below art handy for finding Driven pulley: RPM -_ diameter
diamctcr diameter
Diameter
x RPM
RPM
of driven
Driving
RPM
diameter
Engine
Controls
The engine is almost always located some distance away from the steering station of the boat, so remote controls must be installed for operating the throttle, the reverse gear, and an emergency shutdown in the case of some two-cycle diesel engines. This used to be done with complicated linkages of rods, pipes, and bell cranks and was a job One of the greatest boons was the advent of the hydraulic of major proportions.
220
MISCELLANEOUS requiring
DETAILS but fingertip effort on a small lever on the gear instead of the to operate the old manual clutch. This led to the reduced the that drastically
reverse gear,
many foot-pounds
of effort needed
push-pull cable controls now seen in most boats, a method time and cost of installation. the engine, The engine control set of levers at the steering station brand of engine Control Controls, for connecting and two push-pull
system now consists of an attractive cables running from the levers to maker usually has kits for each to the gear and throttle. Morse heads is an out-
The control
heads of high quality can be furnished Ohio 44236. firsthand Canada 4806 N. E. 12th Avenue, is Kobelt
by one of the oldest makers, Another pioneer in control Florida 33308, A newcomer Co., Ltd.,
fit that can give advice from much with a first class product Vancouver, British for push-pull
Columbia, cables,
as is Teleflex.
Limerick, Pennsylvania 19468. The length of cables between control but they should be installed
levers and the engine can be almost unlimited, number of bends, and the minimum Contrary to the opiA litof the incables. They should
with a minimum
bend radii for the size of cable being used must not be exceeded. nions of some, it is a mistake to restrict only be secured sufficiently tle time spent planning bends. The control stallation. A variation of a control head with two levers per engine the cable the movement of push-pull to keep them from interfering furnish
runs will show which way has the least number really good instructions
manufacturers
is planned the same as when there are two levers. When two or rnc*e control stations are planned
cables with many bends, consideration should be given to hydraulic controls for the Inc., mentioned earlier in this chapter under Steering throttle and gears. Hynautic. Controls, has a system that may do the job for you.
Engine
Connections
Water,
connections
tion cannot cause premature failure of the lines. Cooling water lines to the engine should be hose, double clamped at each end with stainless steel hose clamps whenever possible. On the other hand, fuel lines should be hose of approved type with threaded ends and rtezler clamped. The reader should heed the relatively new regulations described in the following chapter. A good number of boats have sunk because exhaust clamped to the adjoining widths and hose overlap permitted on this subject. See the following by the American chapter hoses have been inadequately clamp
rigid pipes or tubes. Figure 16-18 shows the minimum for additional reference
DETAILS
221
wo
uo5e
CLAMPS
of ~%cI=! r 12
Mlfd. WIOfH
Figure Electrical
16-18.
System
Here is a part of modern boatbuilding that can get a builder into a lot of trouble. If he is lucky, there will be only one voltage on board, such as 12 volts direct current. However, more often these days there will also be 115 volts of alternating a shoreline perhaps not running, AC-powered connection to operate a charger to keep the batteries while dockside. also operate the AC side of a dual voltage refrigerator air conditioning heating current from topped off and to further, an
AC independent
on board can be used to provide conveniences or air conditioning, in USC aboard, television,
and also IWO DC voltages, in some of the larger and there are of overload proto cope with the by the length of should be must be by due
such as 12 and 24 or 12 and 32. The complications American Boat and Yacht Council standards the standards
are endless:
thrrc seems to be no end at all. But this has been recognized, that alfe~tpl are a guide to the all-important matter
Materialwise.
tection to avoid fire and to the type of insulated conductors necessary various environments aboard a boat. The conductor size is governed thr wire and the ampere stranded approved crimped load to be carried, failure rather than solid to minimize terminals from vibration.
to say about electrical in boats with gasoline by the appearance standards. circuit has been a small breakers
installations,
to safe electrical
is listed in the following chapter. For years, the only hardfor circuit pro-
Life is being made easier for the boatbuilder switchboards switchboard meeting availahle ware store-type tection. to boatmen
12-volt DC panel
having six to a dozen toggle switches and automotive Now, there There are DC panels and combination circuit breakers selection is a sufficient sizes, all having approved of batteries. the circuits utilize Marinetics
and meters to show loads and the condition of panels and load capacities eliminates the necessity 92663. One of the pioneers California
custom
Beach,
222
MISCELLA
NEOLJS llET/lILS
Battery
Storage
Boxes in a lead-arid to overturn: storage battery is very destructive whether there to wood and certain
The worst thing that can happen is for an it consists of a single or coveted In craft are on the market batteries
the battery,
bc secured.
molded plastic cases, with straps and hold-down to eight ships service Onr of the simplest resistant by carefully batteries. containers
larger boats there might be a bank of two engine starting is made of plywood,
for which custom boxes must be built. with its interior lining the box with fiberglass. The inside dimen-
and completely
sions of the box should be about 3i Wlarger all around than the battery to provide space for spilled water, which can be removed by suction with an oven baster. A couple of expendable the clearance. wooden blocks can be used to keep the battery like Masonite from shifting despite so that exThe top should be of a material and ventilated
plosive hydrogen generated when the battery top also guards against the possibly dangerous tool be accidentally Figure dropped 16-19 is a suggested battery box.
is being charged will not be trapped. A sparking that would take place should a terminals.
Fresh
Water
Fresh water tanks should be just as carefully One difference is that there should outlet. This is used to drain the tank weather. Suitable water tank materials and cost, stainless vided the interior is treated to remove
be an opening
in the bottom
of the tank-
when a boat is unused or stored in freezing include Monet Alloy 400. superior in quality and fiberglass, protaste and odor.
MISCELLANEOUS Plumbing Copper water, marine (PVC) used to be the ultimate but it has had drawbacks, for piping, either
DETAILS
223
salt water or hot and cold fresh to develop necessary pinholes. Now it is to hook it up. The polyvinyl chloride a fast to concooling
such as a tendency
costly not only as piping but in thz price of the fittings supply stores have good quality pipe, some of which is suitable tubing suitable fittings. for hot water,
polybutylene
nect with the available Where pipes pierce water intakes, etc. -up
the hull for any reason whatsoever-toilet to about a foot above the normal waterline, connected
connections,
approved full-flow sea cocks rather than valves or other devices made of brass or similar be corroded by sea water the boat remained undetected until too late. Here again the American
Yacht Council standards should be used for guidance. Intakes for engine cooling, etc., must have scoop strainers outside of the hull and also good quality intake strainers the water. tween the sea cock and the device pumping
Water There
Trap
Vent of fresh air through a boat even when it is otherwise at sea some years as it permits ventilation as desired for best
closed up. The vent shown in Figure 16-20 was developed for sailboats ago and remains while excluding and practical for any type of boat, The rain and flying spray. cowl can be turned
g.hi
Figure
16-20.
224
MISCELLANEOUS
DETAILS
MATERIAL FACTOR
60,000
LBS.l?S.I. 4
STE
OF SAFETY= rL- 4
IO0
5 4+ 4 3g 3
5--/-AZ PKlCIrtr REACH B= ANGLE OF HEEL C - HCELCP REACH 0: nr m.oYE PPLR BEAQING
--
TO USE
--- --
.-
DWW LlNE(2) THR REACH s LOAD. FROM INTERSECTION WITH B.M. LINE PRoJEC7(F) PARALLEL WITH GUIDE LINES TO PIPE SIZE SCALES.
: : 50a--
3 z z I
: 2 al*-w - a
55
Ii la
PIPE
1 30
DAVITS
16-21. The removable screen should opening or copper. not be used unless there are insects, because
by about 25 percent.
plastic kind that bends when a rope crosses it. The tube into the boat The box can be installed
Davits Davits are used for handling poses on commercial against corrosion, anchors and dinghies material aboard yachts and for other purif possible for protection
boats. Aluminum
This is good when, for one reason or another, and stowed and thus needs manhandling. pipe or tube or of ordinary
a davit must be removed from its socket Davits can aiso be made of stainless hot galvanized after shap-
MISCELLANEOUS
Level shpiyhfedge 4 kuli
DETAILS
225
Figure
16-22. fittings are needed on the davit. I worked up the accompa16-21, some years ago when scores of small craft going to
ing and welding whatever nying chart, labeled Figure war were clamoring
for davits for all sorts of uses. If you know the load and the reach
(dimension A), the chart will give a pretty good idea of the pipe size needed. The chart has a built-in safety factor of four using ordinary steel pipe. A davit is basically a cantilevered beam, so if a load swung outboard will heel the boat much, as noted on the chart. or if rolling seas are expected, the reach should be increased then probably be indicated. A larger pipe size will
Anodized aluminum alloy davits of various capacities, ranging from 150 pounds for anchors and up to 1500 pounds for small boats, are made as stock items and can be had with a tackle arrangement, in various voltages. The reach, with a hand-operated winch, or with an electric winch dimension A in Figure 16-21. is usually limited to six
feet. Principal makers of the aluminum davits are Mar-Quipt. Inc., 231 S. W. 5th Street, Pompano Beach, Florida 33060, and Pipe Welders, Inc., 413 S. W. 3rd Avenue, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33315.
Painting The boatbuilder today has a choice of the finest exterior finishes imaginable, both for
protection and appearance, from one-part enamels to the very expensive, long-lasting two-part high gloss polyurethane coatings. There is also a wide choice of varnishes and synthetics to protect and bring out the best natural wood trim. Underwater there is also a wide variety of antifouling paints, usually priced according to life expectancy. Here you must be guided by the length of your season and which paint has proven effective in the areas to be frequented. The same makers of the fine marine exterior coatings (perhaps paint is becoming extinct?) have material for the interior as well, and there is nothing wrong with the high-grade latex-base paints, which make cleanup so easy with water.
226
DETAILS
Marking
Nothing looks worse to yachtsmen tom paints. waterline way to mark outboard Figure Assuming
than a ragged division between the topside and bothas had the foresight during construction, waterline to mark the designed just about the easiest at frequent intervals
along the hull and then lay off heights profile. 16-22,
to the boot top as scaled from the plan of the are set up at the ends of the boat as shown in tightly between the there.
until it barely touches the hull and a point is marked as often as desired.
By moving the cord in and out on the straightedges may be marked if it is allowed to sag, the waterline line. The
and aft and there is room to work, a builders boot top or stripe is usually
above the waterline can be taken from the plans and plotted as shown in the figure. A batten is nailed on the hull to fair the points and mark the line, which is done by scribing with the broken end of a hacksaw wood. blade or similar device or with a so-called race knife made for scribing
Chapter
17
SAFETY
one made to be paddled or rowed. As soon as holes are made in the hull underbody for through-hull fittings or machinery and electrical installations are made, precautions must be taken building learned number to prevent leaking, sinking, fire, or explosion. available Newcomers to boatare fortunate the bard way in having information to keep them out of trouble.
sinking caused by a rotted hose attached to a valveless underfitting, loss of fire control from the wrong kind or an inadequate fire and/or explosion because a fuel line to an engine
of fire extinguishers,
was installed without slack and broke from vibration, loss of life because passengers aboard a sinking boat could not find the life preservers. These occurrences and others were and are preventable. The very nnturc of boats calls for deck levels of varying heights steps and ladders. hand Risk of injury can be reduced that are securely important fastened rails and grabs in place to be accessible number by of by having an adequate
with through-fastenings
American
with safety.
the preparation of standards for safe practices in the general areas of hull, equipment, machinery, electrical, and engineering standards. Ample time has been given for comment and criticism of the standards one-sided before they have been approved: therefore the standards do not represent opinions. 227
220
SAFETY
STANDARDS standards in each of the divisions mentioned the Secretary, American above and all are
or as a complete contact
book called Safety Standards for Small Craft. Boat and Yacht Council, as issued Membership is open to all, in which case
For a list of these standards Box 806, Amityville, the complete set of standards
Federal
Safe Boating
Regulations and equipment systems installations that resulted in explosions, engines, prepared safe com-
construction,
file, and loss of life have inevitably fuel systems, electrical and safe powering, Council, builder, guidelines
in case of swamping.
and Yacht
to the U.S.
he be a manufacrecomCoast Safety,
the standards
by law are the same as the practices from your nearest of U.S.
by the ABYC. booklets from may be obtained I1.S. Coast Guard, Office Boating
Electrical System Compliance Guideline applies to all inboard or inboard/outboard gasoline-powered boats and boats that have gasoline auxiliary engines such as generators. Fuel engines System (except Compliance outboard boats. Compliance Guide--applies canoes, to monohull boats less than 20 feet in boats. Boat Builders, In addition, is a kayaks, or inflatable Guideline applies to all boats powered with gasoline engines), all boats with gasoline auxiliary engines, such as tanks that are permanently installed in inboard and
generators,
and to gasoline~fuel
boon to the home builder and includes directions how to go about and how to obtain Hopefully careful attaching a capacity label
as to how to work up the safe loading it tells label to the hull, backyard is good. builder: a
for boats under 20 feet long to which the law applies. and a certification for your boat. a would-be a hull identification things number
all these
Many government
them boring to read, to say the least, but not so the guidelines put out by the Coast Guard. These clearly illustrate with simple line drawings what is acceptable and what is prohibited,
,,:,s,y (3
* ,
STANDARDS
229
A step for safety beyond mere words has also been taken. Manufacturers their products the testing tested for compliance section with American of the well-known Boat and and Yacht respected Safety dards and so labeled when the product meets the requirements. is the marine (UL), Laboratories the material located which succeeded the pioneering Yacht
Underwriters
RECOMMENDED
READING
Ruilding
Cl~ssrc S~lnll
Crc#,
by John
International together
Marine
Publishing
Co., 2 1 Elm Street, tions for building Bouthuildi:rg Co., construction also contains Colvin
Camden, a number
Maine 04843.
C. Klingel. Written
International
Marine
21 Elm Street,
by an advocate
of welded steel
craft,
entitled
by Thomas as is Klingrl
is just as enthusiastic
about aluminum
Boats. 90706.
both
from
Glen -L
Because
plywood is
the instructions
in these book3
covering
Thr GOU.,~PON Brothcars on Boat Construction, Street. authors. Bay City, Michigan 48iO6. This volume cold-molded
is a complete
treatment
232
RECOMMENDED
RE.4 DING Simmons. Camden, 04849.) Originally Maine published by International (Reprint published by in the art of
Publishing
04843.
Maine
A book specializing
planking. Cold-Molding, Co., 21 Joinrry, Elm Fitting Out, by John Camden, Maine with in depth.
Street,
from start to finish. Well illustrated of cold-molding U.S. Coast is described Guard
photocgraphs and line drawings. Sq@ty CC-466, booklet Federal Standards availahle foreword: recreational safety for This individual
Builders, District
Publication by the of is to
from nearest
Coast
Guard
Office.
Best described
explanation
of these requirements
to be the cause
American
Boat
and Yacht
Council, especially
Inc.,
Box
industry
standards
of equipment.
and Allied
Publica-
England. of boatbuilding.
Shrj) and .-!ircrali Fairin,q and Dvzr~lopmcwt, by S.S. Rabl, Cornell Maritime Press, Cc~ntrc*viIIc~.Maryland 21Gli. A good old book with clearly illusrrated details of some Iofring rrchniqut~s. Wood: A Manualfor Its Use as a Shipbuilding Material. Department of Ships, building, 1957-1962. moisture (Reprint: content, Teaparty including structural No. Books, Kingston, superb source of information, specifications of the Navy, Bureau 1983.) etc. Departabout A
Massachusetts,
(Ilandhook Available
Products much
of Documents,
U.S. Government
Washington,
basic information
National Fisherman, 21 Elm Street, loaded with news, pictures, WoodenBoat, WoodenBoat a
bi-monthly Inc.,
wooden Maine
Publications,
04616.
(I
EQUIVALENTS
= 2.54
cm
1 mm 1 cm
cm ft. km
= 1 fathom mile
= 1.8288 mile
1 ';tat.ute mile
1 statute
1 km = 0.6214
Area 1 sq. in. 1 sq. ft. 1 sq. ft. = 6.4516 = 0.0929 sq. cm sq. m 1 sq. cm = 0.1550 sq. ft. sq. ft. sq. ft.
Volume 1 cu. in. = 16.39 cu. cm 1 cu. cm = 0.061 cu. in. 1 gal. =231 cu. in. 1 1. = 0.03531 cu. ft. cu. m = 28.32 1. 1 1. = 2.113 1 I. = 1.057 = 3.785 1. and 1 pt. = & gal.; 1 qt. = % gal. 233 = U.S. gal., pts. qts.
1 cu. ft. = 1728 cu. in. 1 1. = 61.017 cu. in. 1 cu. ft. = 7.481 gal. 1 pt. = 0.4732 I. 1 qt. = 0.9464 1. 1 gal. Note: = 7.481 cu. ft. The gal. above = 0.0283
234
EQUIVALENTS
Weight 1 oz. = 28.35 1 oz. = 0.02835 1 lb. 1 lb. = 16 oz. = 453.6 gr. = 0.4536 kg g-r kg 1 g-r = 0.03537 1 kg = 35.274 1 oz. = 0.0625 1 kg = 2.2046 oz. oz. lb. lb.
Pressure 1 lb. per sq. in. 1 kg per sq. cm Miscellaneous 1 Imp. gal. = 1.2 U.S. gal. = 0.0703 = 14.223 kg per sq. cm lb. peh- sq. in.
1 ft. high column of water = 0.434 lb. per sq. in. 1000 warts = 1 kilowatt = 1.34 hnrsepower 1 horsepower 1 long ton = 746 watts = 35 cu. ft. of sea water lb. = 1.85318 km per hr. = 62.5 = 64 lb. mile per hour = 2240 lb.
1 cu. ft. fresh water 1 cu. ft. sea water 1 knot 1: 1 nautical
OF
64TH
AN OF
INCH AN INCH
WITH
MILLIMETER I
,! ji
I
/ Decimal ---____
Fraction __---.
,&.dhs ___
Dcclmal
Mllhms*ars ,approx.,
1 Milhmeters Capprox.) -~
I/ ---
%i '42
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 9
.015625 .03125 m6875 .0625 .07al25 ! .09375 .109375 ,125 .I40625 .15625 .17la75 I .la75 .203125 .21875 .234375 .250 ! .265625 .28125 .296875 .3125 .328125 .34375 .359375 ,375 .390625 .40625 .421875 .4375 .453125 .46875 .484375 .5oo j I
0.397 0.794 1.191 1.588 1.984 2.381 2.778 3.175 3.572 3.969 4.366 4.763 5.159 5.556 5.953 6.350 6.747 7.144 7.541 7.938
/I
I/
._._ "A ii
33 34 35 36
.515625 53125 546875 .5625 -578125 -59375 .609375 .625 MO625 A5625 .671875 .6875
: j I ' I 1 : I i
13.097 13.494 13.891 14.288 14.684 15.081 15.478 15.875 16.272 16.669 17.066 17.463 17.859 18.256 18.653 19.050 19.447 19.a44 20.241 20.638 21.034 21.431 21.828 22.225 22.622 23.019 23.416 23.813 24.209 24.606 25.003 25.400
J&i ?4
zt 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 '20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
.703125 .71875 .734375 , .750 ' .765625 .78125 .796875 A125 .a28125 .a4375 .a59375
a.334
a.731 9.128 9.525
....
a7A ___. T-6 'I / ._._ agA ;5& _.._ % /i 'I 1"" '
.a75
INDEX
Abcking & Rasmussen, 24 Abbreviations, lines plans, 69 ABYC standards: for electrical installa. tions, 221; for exhaust hoses, 220; for fuel tanks, 212-213; for sea cocks, 223; for propeller shafts, 213-217 Additives, epoxy rrsin, 36, 64. 165 Adhesives, 64-65: sources for, 65; waterproof, 64. SW also Epoxy resins, Glue Aerolite glue, 64, 65 Aircraft Spruce and Specialty Co.. 65 Airex foam core, 41 Allied Resin Corp., 65 Aluminum construction: davits. 224.225: fuel tanks, 212-213: hulls, 9. 43; spars, 205-206. American Boat and Yacht Council (ABYC). 227-228. SW n&o ABYC standards American Dureau of Shipping (ABS). 26 American Klegecell Corp., 41 Anchorfast nails, 48. 52, 58-59 Anti-fouling paints, 225 Arc-bottomed hulls. 2; frames for. 96; setting up, 108 Arcon epoxies, 64 Ash. white, 25 Augers, 16 Backbone assembly, 105
Backbone structures. 101-105 Ballast keel, 195 Bahek Corp., 41 Batrs. Fred. 148 Battens: for fairing cutves, 73, 76-77, 78-79. 97. 110. 116; as pick-up sticks, 78, 79-80: in planking, 144.146: for planking scale, 136-137: for spiling. 133-134 Batten seam planking, 144-146 Battery storage boxes. 222 Bearings, propeller shaft assembly. 213-217 Berths, 184 Bevel board, 98 Bevels. 94. 96-98: by computer, 99. of floor timbers, 124; of lapstrake planks, 142-143, of transom assembly, 99-100 Bilge stringers, 125 nont ou~rffrs nuycr.5 ChidfJ, 9. 10 Body plan. 77-78 Bolts: carriage, 51; drift. 50-51. 105. 198, 209; hanger, 55; lag. 55: screw. 50 Boot top (waterline), 226 Breast hook, 154 Bruynreel plywood. 29 Bulkheads, 159. 183-186 Bulwark rail. 174-175 Butt blocks, 92. 131. 149
mmx
Buttocks, 67, 80, 83 Butts, plywood, 184 Cabin trunk, 171-173 Cabosil, 36, 165 Camber, deck beam, 153. 156-157 Cant frames, 120 Canvas deck covering, 163-165 Canvas duck, 162 Carve1 planking, 35, 130-131, 138-139 Cast fittings, 192-195: rudder stock, 210-211 Cast iron keel, 195-96 Caulking, 93, 138-140, 166-169 Cedar: Ala ka. 25: Port Orford. 23: western rt 1, 23; white. 23 Ceiling, 188 C-Flex plankir :. 37-38 Chainplates. 19; 198 Champion Buildil T Products, 28. 29. 30 Chrm-Tech epoxy, h 1, 65 Chrm-Irrh. Inc., 65 Chine. 7 ClilmpS. 124, 153-156. 2t.l Clench-nailing, 60.61 Clinker planking, 14 1 Coamings: cockpit. 173: hatch. 177-178 Cockpit roaming. 173 Cockpit, self-bailing. 179 Cockpit sole. 179 Cold-molded hulls. 32-33. 89. 150-151,
i.52
237
Deckhouse, 17 1 - 173 Deck line, 76, 83 Decks: caulked, 166-169: plywood, 163; strip-built, 162-163; teak, 166-169; tongue-and-groove, 161-162 Deck shelf, 153 Defender Industries, Inc., 36 Developable-surface hull, 5, 149 Diagonal planking, 152 Diagonals, 67. 69. 78-80 Double planking. 143-144 Dowels, 96. 209 Drawers, 186 Drills, 16-17 Duck Trap Woodworking, 61 Duraply. 28-29. 183 Dynel. 35 Edson Corp.. The. 212 Electrical systems, 221 Electrolysis, 48-49 Elmers glues, 64, 65. 186 Engine: bed, 129; connections, controls. 219-220; stringers, vibration, 218 Epoxy resins, 36, 64. 147-148. Evrrdur. 47
Computers: for fairing lines, 87; [or lofting. 99 Condon. M.L., Company, 32 Contourkore bals;l core. 41 Corrosion, galvanic. 43, 48-50. 63 Cotton caulking, 138-140 Cotton wicking. 143 Countcrborcs. 16.17, 53 Countrrsinks. 16-17. 54 Counter stern. ! YO-I21 Couplings, propeller shaft. 218-219 Cowl ventilator, 223-224 Cradles, 41 Cross spalls. 92. 109 Cypress. 23 Davits. 224-225 Deadwood. 104 Dean Company, Thr. 33 Deck beams, 156-157 Deck coverings: canvas, 163-165: fiberglass cloth, 165
Fairing: of diagonals. 79-80: of lines. 76-77; computer-aided. 87. 99. .%Y nlso Battens Fastening materials: brass. 47: bronzr. 47; copper. 48; galvanized iron, 46-47: stainless steel, 48 Fastenings: in double planking, 143. 144: drilling for, 52-54: interior, 186: plank, 137-138 Frrrocement hulls, 44 Fiberglass cloth, 37, 165 Fiberglass hulls. 9. 36-37, 39-41. 89 Fiberglass insulation. I89 Fiberglass sheathing, 35-36 Fillers. 36. 168 Fin keels, 104 Fir, Douglas, 22 Fir plywood, 28 Flat-bottomed hulls. 2-3. 71. 103. 108 Floor timbers, 123-124 Florida Marine Tanks. Inc.. 213 Foam core, 39 Formica, 28, 183 Frames. 88: bending. 119-123: coldfitted. 120-123: steaming, 119: transvrrse. 117. v-bottomed 96-97 Framing. 3-5
238
INDEX
Keel Makers, 196- 197 Keels: cast iron, 195-196; fin, 104; lead, 195. 196-197; powerboat, 103-104: rabbeted, IO3 Kenyon Marine, 205 Krvlar, 36, 44 Kit boats. 9 Klegecel foam core, 41 Knees, 105; hanging, 158-159; lodging, 158: quarter, 154-156 Kobelt Manufacturing Co., Ltd., 220 Kristal Kraft. Inc., 65 Laminated beams, 157 Laminated planking, 150-151. 152 Lamination: of fiberglass hull. 37; of stem assembly, 92; of wood, 31-32 Lapstrake planking, 108, 141-143 Larch, 25 Lauan. 24 Lead keels. 195, 196-197 Letcher. John, 87 Lexan, I78 Lines, hull (terminology), 66-69 Lodging knees, 158 Lofting: computer-aided, 99: of body plan. 77-79; of half-breadth plan, 76-77: of long lines of profile, 76-77: of transoms. 81-87, preparations for, 72-74; tools for, 72-73 Logan Lumber Company, 32 Lumber: drying, 21: sawing, 17-18. 21; seasoning, 18-Z 1; shrinkage, 2I: sources, 32-33 Mack-Shaw Sailmakers, Inc., 206 Mahogany: African, 24; Honduras, Mexican, 24; Philippine, 24 Marconi rig. 204
Fuel hose lines, 220 Fuel tanks, 212-213 Fuller, W.L.. Inc., 54 Galvanic corrosion, 43. 48-50. 63 Galvanic series, 49 Carboard, 134- I35 Gel coat, 37 Glue: batten seam, 144; Elmers 64. 65, 186: resorcinol, 64. 147-148 Gluing: plywood planking. 149: spars, 201-202. See also Laminatton Cougeon Brothers, Inc., 32, 65, 150
Coufyon
Ilon.
Rrothm
Thf~,
Rtrnl
Comtruc-
151 Graphite fibers. 44 Grids: for inverted hull construction, 109: for offsets, 73-74: for transom plan, 81 Gripe, 105 Guzzwell. John, 151 Hackmatack, 25 Half beams. 157-158 Half-breadth plan, 93-95 Half-model, 69 Hanging knees, 158-159 Ilarbor Sales Company, 29. 30, 65 Harra. John, Wood & Supply ComIIilIlyq 32 Hatches: cabin sole, 188.189: [let-k, 176-179: flush, 179: sliding, 175.176 Headers, I57 Headliners, 189 Herreshoff & Kerwin. Inc.. 87 Horn timber, 105 Hull design, 2-5 Hull lines (terminology), 7. 66-69 Hull painting, 141 Hull repairs, 39 IHydraulic engine controls, 220 Hydraulic steering, 212 I-lynautic, Inc., 212, 220 Icebox, 189-191 Independent Nail Insulation. 189
24;
Mnrirw Iksign
Mtrnunl. 37
Mar-Quipt, Inc., 225 Masonite, 186 Mast partners, I58 Mast step, 204-205
Modrm
Inc., 46, 58
Woo&n
Ydrt
Carrstructiotl,
Joinerwork: deck, 170- 181: interior. 182-191 Joints: mortise-.,nd-tenon, 107; 32, 105-106 scarphed. Juniper. 23 Keel blocks, I12
151 Mold construction 88-92 Mold loft, 72 Molds: for cast fittings, 193-194; for fiberglass hulls, 36-37; for keels, 195-197; for strip-planked hulls, 148 Monel fastenings, 48. 50, 58, 62 Monel tanks, 212 Monkey rail, 175
INDEX
Morse controls, 220 10 Rabbet, 77, 78. 92. 103 Refrigerator. SIT Icebox Resorcinol glue, 64. 147-148 Reverse curves. 122. 151 Rhodes, Philip, 149. 201 Ribbands. 88. 109. 1 IO. 112-l I6 Ribs, 117 Riveting, 62-63 Rivets: copper. 55-56, 143: pop. 62-63 Rot prevention, 33-34 Round-bottomed hulls, 2-3; bilge stringers. 125: frames, 88. 118; lines, 71; planking, 38 Rudder fittings. 208 Rudders: outboard. 207-208; powerboat, 206-207: sheathed. 211 Quarter knees. 154-156
239
National
Fisherman,
9. 32
44
Nomex honeycomb, Non-skid sole, 189 Oak: red, 22; white, Offsets, 69-72. 78
22
Painting: of deck joinerwork. 171: of hull, 141 Paints: anti-fouling. 225; Pxterior. 225; interior, I83 Panish Transdyne. 220 Patterns, casting: for fittings, 192-195, for keels, 195-197 Pick-up sticks, 78 Pinr: longleaf. 22-23; Oregon, 22; white, 23; yellow, 22-23 Pipe Wcldcrs. Inc.. 225 Planking: batten scam, 144. 146; carvel. 130-140; double. 143-144; laminated, 150-152: lapstrakc*, 111-1-13: plywood, 149-150; strip, 146-149: transom, 100-101 Planking dimensions. 132: thickness drducrion. #Y-Y0 Planking scale. 136. I37 Planksherr. I66 Plugs. wood. 53-5-l Plumbing, 223 Plywood: bending, 30-31; cutting. :iO: grading, 28-29: laminating, 31-32; panel sizes, 29 Plywood decks, I63 Plywood interior structures, 182-183 Plywood planking, 149-150 Polybutylenr tubing, 223 Polypropylrnr cloth, 35, 36 Polyurethane coatii:g, 17 I Polyvinyl chlnricle (PVC) pipes, 223 Powerboat construction: clamp, 158: rngine beds. 129: keels, 103-104: rudders. 206-207: shelf, 158; transom. 85-87: twin-screw, 218 Preservatives, wood, 34. 141 Profile plans. 77. 92 Propeller shafts, 213-219 Pulley drives, calculating, 21Y Push-pull cables, 220 PVC pipes, 223
RGn-
Safety: davit design for, 225: features, 227; product testing for. 229: regulations, 228
Sn fbt,y Starndri rds /or lkck yn rd Bon t Buildm. 228 Safety Stnndarrls for Snr~ll Crcr/t. 228
Sail track, 204 Sandwich (fiberglass hull) construction. 36. 38.39 Scantlings (trrminolcqy). 34 Scarphs. 105.106. 147. 184. 199 Schaefer Spars, 206 Srrews. 16-17, 51-55: galvanized, 47: lag, 55; machine, 61: stainless sreel. 54-55 Scribing of waterline, 226 Scuppers. 174, 176. 179 Sea cocks, 223 Sealers, 28, 168 Sea rails, 184 Scats. cockpit. 179-l HO Sections: bocly plan, 67. 77-78: slrm. 94 Seemann Plastics, Inc.. 37 Self-bailing cockpits, 179 Shaft logs, 103-104. 215 Sheathing: copper. 104; fibc=rglass. 35-36 Sheer clamp, 126-128 Sheer guards, 180- 182 Sheerline. 76-77 Shelves. 153-156 Sole: cabin. 188-189: cockpit, 179
240
INDEX
Torin, 41 Transom. connections to, 154-156 Transom, construction of. 99-101 Transom, lofting of: curved, 82-83: flat, 81-82: powerboat, 85-87; raked, 81 Tremont Nail Co.. 61 Tributyl tin oxide (TBTO). 34 Twin keelsons. 103 Underwriters LaGoratories (UL). 229 Unipoxy glue. 65 U.S. Coast Guard regulations: for passenger-carrying boats. 14; safety, 228 U.S. Coast Guard standards: for electrical installations. 221: tanks, 212 Varnishing, 170-171. 182. 201 V-bottomed hulls. 2-3: clamps, 128: floors, 123; frames, 88. 96. 117-118; lines, 72; planking, 38: seam batten construction. 144; setting up, 108 Veneers, 28 Ventilation, 187- 188. 223-224 Watrrlines. 67. 76. 80. 225-226 Water trap box, 223 WEST System (Wood Epoxy Saturation Technique), 150 Wheel, steering, 2 12 Wicking, 105. 138 Wiley. Ralph, 148 Wire rigging, 204 Wood: A Manual FOT Its list ds A
Spars, aluminum, 205-206 Spars, wooden, 198-204; hollow rectangular, 200-201, hollow round, 201-202 Spiling. 133-13 Spiling frames, 135 Spinnaker poles, 20 l-202 Splines. 103 Spruce: northern white, 24; Sitka, 24, 198. 199 Stanley tools, 15-16 Star class sloop, 2 Stations, 78, 83 Stealer planks, 137 Steam box, 119-120 Steel hull construction, 9. 42-43 Steering controls, 211-212 Stem assembly, 92-95 Sternpost, 104 Stopwaters, 96, 105 Stringers, 124-128 Strip-planked hulls, setting up, 108 Strip planking, 146-149 Stronghold nails, 52, 58-59 Stuffing box, 211, 215, 217 Synthetic fabrics, 35-36 Table of offsets. 73 Tamarack. 25 Tangile. 24 Tangs, 204 Tank rapacity, calculating. 213 Tanks, fresh water. 222 Tanks, fuel, 212-213 Teak, 25, 168-169 Teleflex, Inc.. 220 Templates, 67; for bulkheads, 185; for stem assembly, 92-95; for spinnaker pole, 202 Tenons, 107 Thiokol sealers. 168. I69 Tie rods. 158. 206 Tillers, 2 I 1 Toe rails, 166, 174 Tools: caulking, 139: hand, 15-17: lofting, 72-73; power, 17-18; sourres. 18
Shiphui!di?lg
Matcmal,
25
Wood: comparative strengths, 26; design stresses, 26-27; species for boatbuilding. 22-25 Woodcraft Supply Corp., 65
WoodrnRoat,
Wood Wood finishes, screws,
32
interior. 182.813 51-55
Wood Ilnndh~ol~.
26
16.17. 46-47
Zinc plating.